SYNTHESIS SDP-40HD
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus, (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as when a power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
This triangle, which appears on your component,
alerts you to the presence of uninsulated,
dangerous voltage inside the enclosure voltage that may be sufficient to
constitute a risk of shock.
•
•
•
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
This triangle, which appears on your component,
alerts you to important operating and
maintenance instructions in this
accompanying literature.
Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions for power requirements. Be advised that different operating voltages may require the use of a different line cord and/or attachment plug.
Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack, or directly above heat producing equipment such as power amplifiers. Observe the maximum ambient operating temperature listed in the product
specification.
Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly to any of the unit's connectors.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on. The user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
JBL, Lexicon, Logic 7 and the L7 logos are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Incorporated.
Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
DTS, DTS-ES, and Neo:6 are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. and DTS 96/24 is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Macrovision is a registered trademark of Macrovision Corporation. All rights reserved.
Harman Consumer Group, Inc.
8500 Balboa Park
Northridge, CA 91329
250 Crossways Park
Woodbury, NY 11797
516-255-4JBL
www.jbl.com
SACD is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
SHARC is a registered trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.
Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, and is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under
authorization.
THX is a registered trademark of THX Ltd. Ultra2 is a trademark of THX Ltd. All rights reserved.
TOSLINK is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
© 2006 Harman International Industries, Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Part No. 070-18567 | Rev 0 | 11/06
Features, specifications, and appearance are subject to change without notice.
Introduction
JBL
DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS
This document contains general safety, installation and operation instructions for the SDP-40HD Digital Surround Processor/Controller. It is
important to read this user guide before attempting to use the product. Pay particular attention to safety instructions.
The following symbols are used in the document:
Appears on the component to indicate the presence of uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside
the enclosure – voltage that may be sufficient to
constitute a risk of shock.
Appears on the component to indicate important operating and maintenance instructions in
the accompanying literature.
WARNING
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like that, if not correctly performed
or adhered to, could result in injury or death.
CAUTION!
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like that, if not correctly performed
or adhered to, could result in damage or
destruction to part or all of the product.
Note:
Calls attention to information that is essential to
highlight.
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
Represents a menu path. The menu items in gray boxes must be
selected with the remote control Menu arrow to access the
menu or menu item in the black box. For example, the SETUP,
INPUTS, and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the
DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu.
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and will
continue to be used as an example throughout this document.
Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a
menu path, any other input may be substituted.
This document uses the term DTS(-ES) to indicate that DTS-ES encoding may or may not be present in the input source.
ii
Introduction
SDP-40HD
Table of Contents
Documentation Conventions........................................................ ii
Getting Started
About The SDP-40HD................................................................ 1-2
Highlights ............................................................................. 1-4
Product Registration .................................................................. 1-5
Installation Considerations......................................................... 1-5
Remote Control Battery Installation and Replacement ............... 1-6
Basic Operation
Front-Panel Overview ................................................................ 2-2
Rear-Panel Overview.................................................................. 2-5
Remote Control Overview ......................................................... 2-9
Operation Considerations ...................................................... 2-9
Command Bank Activation ...................................................... 2-10
Command Matrix ............................................................... 2-11
Menu Navigation .................................................................... 2-16
Main Menu ......................................................................... 2-16
Menu Item Selection ........................................................... 2-17
About the Zones ..................................................................... 2-19
Two-line Status........................................................................ 2-19
Status Menus .......................................................................... 2-20
Status Menu Level Meters ................................................... 2-21
Status Menu Descriptions .................................................... 2-22
Status Menu Parameter Descriptions ................................... 2-26
Speaker Setup ......................................................................... 3-27
Calibrating Speaker Distances & Output Levels ....................... 3-39
Speaker Calibration Parameters ........................................... 3-39
LEVELS Calibration .............................................................. 3-40
Rear-Panel Configuration......................................................... 3-47
Display Setup .......................................................................... 3-49
On-Screen Display ............................................................... 3-51
Front-Panel Display ............................................................. 3-53
Volume Control Setup............................................................. 3-54
Trigger Setup .......................................................................... 3-56
Lock Options........................................................................... 3-59
Audio Controls
Audio Controls .......................................................................... 4-2
Mode Adjust
Mode Adjust ............................................................................. 5-2
Listening Mode Activation......................................................... 5-2
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters ..................... 5-3
Mode Buttons ....................................................................... 5-4
Mode Family Selection Buttons ............................................. 5-4
Listening Mode Descriptions ..................................................... 5-5
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions......... 5-35
Mode – Parameter Relationships.............................................. 5-43
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
Setup
Setup ........................................................................................ 3-2
Input Setup ............................................................................... 3-3
Changing Input Names ......................................................... 3-4
Assigning HDMI, Audio and Video Input Connectors ............. 3-6
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes .................................... 3-13
Configuring Advanced Input Settings .................................. 3-19
INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings ....................................... 3-21
ZONE2 & RECORD IN Parameter Settings ........................... 3-24
Troubleshooting........................................................................ 6-2
Routine Maintenance ................................................................ 6-4
Restoring Factory-default Settings ............................................. 6-5
Appendix
Specifications ............................................................................ A-2
Declaration of Conformity ......................................................... A-4
Menu Tree ................................................................................ A-5
Installation Worksheet ............................................................ A-19
iii
Introduction
iv
JBL
1
Getting Started
About The SDP-40HD................................................................. 1-2
Highlights ................................................................................................ 1-4
Product Registration ................................................................... 1-5
Installation Considerations.......................................................... 1-5
Remote Control Battery Installation ............................................ 1-6
Getting Started
ABOUT THE SDP-40HD
Thank you for purchasing the SDP-40HD Digital Controller, a
reference-quality, 12-channel audio and video control center with
independent zone monitoring to provide control of input source
selection in three zones at the same time. As flexible as it is
powerful, the SDP-40HD includes 12 inputs, each of which can be
configured and assigned to any of its 6 HDMI™ (High-Definition
Multimedia Interface™), 13 digital audio, 8 analog audio,
2 composite video, 3 S-video, or 4 component video input
connectors. The analog audio input connectors can be configured
for stereo or 5.1-channel sources.
JBL
decoding, which derives 7.1-channel output from stereo, 5.1-, and
6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, Logic 7 is compatible
with all input sources and requires no special encoding. Because
the improvement it provides is clearly audible, Logic 7 decoding is
widely regarded as the finest available.
In addition to Logic 7, the SDP-40HD is also equipped with Dolby®
Digital Surround EX™, Dolby Pro Logic®, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby
Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24™, DTS NEO:6®, DTS-ES®, THX Ultra2™,
and THX Surround EX™ decoding. THX Ultra2 certification
guarantees that the SDP-40HD meets the highest THX performance
specifications.
The SDP-40HD features an HDMI interface that enables the
transmission of uncompressed digital audio and video signals
through a single connector. The SDP-40HD can pass digital video
signals of up to 720p/1080i, and multiple digital audio channels
(5.1 channels) at sample rates of up to 96kHz through the HDMI
interface. The SDP-40HD also supports the High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection (HDCP) technology that comprises data
encryption and authentication of the partner equipment.
With four 32-bit floating-point SHARC™ digital signal processing
(DSP) engines, the SDP-40HD offers unparalleled processing power.
These DSP engines perform custom processing such as Logic 7
decoding, bass enhancement, dialog enhancement, auto azimuth,
5-speaker enhancement, bass management, high-precision digital
crossovers, and tone controls. This processing is available at sample
rates up to 96kHz, with 24-bit resolution to retain top performance
from all input sources and listening modes. A fifth DSP engine is
dedicated to decoding multi-channel compressed audio sources.
Beyond the HDMI connectors and standard 5.1-channel audio output
connectors, the rear panel includes stereo rear and stereo subwoofer
connectors to provide even more audio channels. All Main Zone audio
output connectors include 24-bit/96kHz D/A converters operating in
dual differential mode. In addition, the SDP-40HD includes balanced
audio output connectors for all Main Zone and Zone 2 channels.
High-precision 96kHz/24-bit A/D converters can be used to convert
stereo and 5.1 analog audio input signals to digital signals,
allowing the SDP-40HD to provide the benefits of precise digital
signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity.
Two RS-232 connectors are provided for serial control. One of the
connectors is for performing flash-memory software upgrades and
backing up or restoring configuration files. The other connector is
reserved for possible upgrades.
More than just an audio and video control center, the SDP-40HD
features the latest version of Harman’s critically acclaimed Logic 7®
1-2
Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage
phase lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high jitter
rejection. Auto azimuth technology corrects timing and level
imbalances in stereo sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate
playback of surround encoded sources. A digital audio passthrough option is available for recording digital signals with a CD
recorder or a similar component.
SDP-40HD
To complement its audio performance, the SDP-40HD features two
broadcast-quality video switchers. An ultra-wide bandwidth
component video switcher accepts analog component or RGB video
signals, & can pass analog high-definition (HD), enhanced-definition
(ED), and standard-definition (SD) TV signals. A composite and
S-video switcher accepts NTSC, PAL or SECAM video signals. Both
switchers are designed to pass video signals without alteration or
degradation. In addition, the SDP-40HD can convert composite and
S-video input signals to analog component video.
High-definition digital TV (HDTV) broadcasts require equipment
that can process and display digital video signals at a resolution of
either 720p or 1080i. For sources with HDMI digital video outputs,
the SDP-40HD delivers these resolutions through the HDMI output
to compatible display devices.
Analog 720p or 1080i video signals can pass through the
broadcast-quality component video switcher. In comparison, most
standard-definition (SDTV) broadcasts have a resolution of 480i.
Getting Started
Some DVD players and enhanced-definition (ED) digital TV
broadcasts have a 480p resolution. For digital video input sources
using an HDMI interface, the SDP-40HD delivers these resolutions
through the HDMI switcher.
Resolution is defined by the number of horizontal lines displayed
on-screen that comprise each frame of a video image. The more
lines of resolution used to create each frame of video, the greater
the detail and sharpness of the image. For example, the resolution
known as 720p refers to 720 horizontal lines of progressive video.
The resolution known as 1080i refers to 1,080 lines of interlaced
video.
An unparalleled processor, the SDP-40HD conveys the best in music
and cinema with awesome power and leading-edge technological
sophistication. Even the most demanding enthusiasts will be
impressed with its exceptional performance. The SDP-40HD is a
must-have addition for any high-quality home theater.
1-3
Getting Started
JBL
HIGHLIGHTS
•
Stereo subwoofer connectors, and one
LFE output connector
•
DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, and DTS-ES
(discrete and matrix) decoding
•
Manual calibration of speaker distances
and output levels
•
THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX
decoding
•
4 sets component video input
connectors with full HDTV compatibility
(3 RCA, 1BNC)
•
THX Ultra2 Certification
•
RS-232 connector for flash memory
software upgrades and configuration
backups
•
1 HDMI output connector
•
2 digital audio output connectors
•
4 composite video output connectors
(2 Main Zone, 2 Record Zone)
Four 32-bit DSP engines
•
Separate DSP engine for decoding
compressed audio sources
4 S-video output connectors (2 Main
Zone, 2 Record Zone)
•
3 trigger output connectors
•
LOGIC 7 decoding
•
Rear panel IR input connector
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro
Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, and Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoding
•
4 microphone input connectors
•
12 channels
•
12 configurable inputs
•
3 independent zones
•
6 HDMI input connectors
•
13 digital audio input connectors,
including 6 S/PDIF coaxial, 6 S/PDIF
optical, and 1 AES/EBU
•
•
5.1-channel analog audio input
connector
1 set BNC component video output
connectors
•
3 S-video input connectors
•
2 composite video input connectors
•
Broadcast-quality video switching
•
•
•
•
Balanced audio output connectors for
all Main Zone and Zone 2 channels
Analog bypass option for stereo and
5.1-channel analog audio input
connectors
•
Auto switching between digital and
analog audio input connectors
•
24-bit/192kHz D/A converters for all
Main Zone audio channels
1-4
Getting Started
SDP-40HD
PRODUCT REGISTRATION
Please register the SDP-40HD Digital Controller within 15 days of
purchase. Register online at www.jbl.com. Retain the original sales
receipt as proof of warranty coverage.
DO NOT obstruct the front-panel IR receiver window. The remote
control must be in line of sight with the IR receiver for proper
operation.
DO NOT install the SDP-40HD on a surface that is unstable or
INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
The SDP-40HD requires special care during installation to ensure
optimal performance. Pay particular attention to instructions below
and to other precautions that appear throughout this user guide.
DO install the SDP-40HD on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table
or shelf. The SDP-40HD can also be installed in a standard 19-inch
equipment rack using an optional rack-mount kit available from an
authorized dealer.
DO select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.
unable to support all four feet, unless it is installed in an
equipment rack.
DO NOT stack the SDP-40HD directly above heat-producing
equipment such as a power amplifier.
CAUTION!
Before moving the SDP-40HD, power the unit off using
the rear-panel power switch and unplug the power cord
from the wall outlet.
DO NOT expose the SDP-40HD to high temperatures, humidity,
steam, smoke, dampness or excessive dust. Avoid installing the
SDP-40HD near radiators and other heat-producing appliances.
DO NOT install the SDP-40HD near unshielded TV or FM antennas,
cable TV decoders, or other RF-emitting devices that might cause
interference.
DO NOT place the SDP-40HD on a thick rug or carpet, or cover the
SDP-40HD with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.
DO NOT place the SDP-40HD on a window sill or any location
exposed to direct sunlight.
1-5
Getting Started
JBL
REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION AND REPLACEMENT
The remote control requires two AA batteries (included).
To install the remote control batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Press the tab and lift the cover away from the remote control.
2. Observing the proper polarity, insert two AA batteries.
3. Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place.
The batteries should be replaced as needed. Alkaline batteries, which last longer without leaking, are recommended. When battery power is
low, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition, preventing it from operating the SDP-40HD. When this occurs, replace the batteries.
Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.
To replace the remote control batteries, remove the old batteries and install new ones following steps above.
1-6
2
Basic Operation
Front-Panel Overview ................................................................. 2-2
Rear-Panel Overview................................................................... 2-5
Remote Control Overview .......................................................... 2-9
Operation Considerations ......................................................................... 2-9
Command Bank Activation ....................................................... 2-10
Command Matrix .................................................................................. 2-11
Menu Navigation ..................................................................... 2-16
Main Menu ............................................................................................ 2-16
Menu Item Selection .............................................................................. 2-17
About the Zones ...................................................................... 2-19
Two-line Status......................................................................... 2-19
Status Menus ........................................................................... 2-20
Status Menu Level Meters ...................................................................... 2-21
Status Menu Descriptions ....................................................................... 2-22
Status Menu Parameter Descriptions ....................................................... 2-26
Basic Operation
JBL
FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW
The SDP-40HD is shown below. The numbers in the front panel illustration correspond with the numbered items below.
2
1
3
4
5
6
12
7
11
8
10
1. Standby Button
7. Zone 2 Input Selection Buttons
2. Front Panel Display
8. Record Zone Input Selection Buttons
3. IR Receiver
9. Record Zone Off Button
4. Volume Knob
10. Zone 2 Off Button
5. Mode and Buttons
11. Main Zone Off Button
6. Main Zone Input Selection Buttons
12. Mute Button
2-2
9
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
1 STANDBY BUTTON
4 VOLUME KNOB
Use the Standby button to activate or deactivate standby mode.
The Standby button performs no function when the SDP-40HD rear
panel power switch is powered off. When standby mode is
deactivated, all SDP-40HD zones that were active during the last
session are reactivated. The red LED in the Standby button lights to
indicate that standby mode is activated. Power is still supplied to
the SDP-40HD when it is put into standby mode.
Use the volume knob to adjust volume level in all zones.
2 FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY
Use the front-panel display to view the current input, listening
mode, input source, and volume level. The 2 x 20 character display
also functions as a display for messages and menus.
Note:
When SDP-40HD output levels are properly calibrated, the +0dB volume
level setting corresponds to the THX reference level (75dB).
To adjust the Main Zone volume level:
Rotate the volume knob clockwise or VOLUME
-34dB
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume level in 1dB increments. A horizontal
bar graph indicating the current Main Zone volume level appears in
the on-screen and front-panel displays. The Main Zone volume
range is –80 to +6dB.
3 IR RECEIVER
To adjust the Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level:
The IR receiver accepts infrared commands from the SDP-40HD
remote control. There are three associated LEDs.
1. Press and hold the front panel Zone 2 or Record Zone input selection button that corresponds with the current input source. For
example, if the current input source is DVD1, press and hold the
Zone 2 or Record Zone DVD1 input selection button.
•
The amber LED blinks when a remote control command is
received.
•
The red LED lights when the A/D converters are overloading.
•
The blue LED lights when the SDP-40HD is powered on and
activated – even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS
parameter is set to ALWAYS OFF.
2. Rotate the volume knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume level in 1dB increments. A horizontal bar graph appears on the onscreen and front panel displays. The Zone
2 or Record Zone volume ranges are –80
to +6dB.
ZONE 2 VOLUME
-34dB
RECORD VOLUME -34dB
3. When the Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level has been set,
release the input selection button.
Red LED
Blue LED
Amber LED
Remote control input selection buttons cannot be used to select
Zone 2 or Record Zone volume level adjustment, even if the Zone 2
or Record Zone command bank is activated.
2-3
Basic Operation
FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW
JBL
(continued)
5 MODE AND BUTTONS
Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous and next available
listening mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown in the MODE
ADJUST menu (See “Mode Adjust” on page 2.). Press the
Mode button to scroll upward through available listening modes.
Press the Mode button to scroll downward through available
listening modes.
selection button activates the Record Zone and selects the
corresponding input. The Main Zone and Zone 2 remain
deactivated until a Main Zone or Zone 2 input is selected.
9 RECORD ZONE OFF BUTTON
Deactivates the Record Zone.
6 MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS
10 ZONE 2 OFF BUTTON
Selects an input in the Main Zone. When an input is selected, a
blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection button. When
the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone input selection
button activates the Main Zone and selects the corresponding
input. Zone 2 and the Record Zone remain deactivated until a Zone
2 or Record Zone input is selected.
Deactivates Zone 2.
11 MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTON
Deactivates the Main Zone.
12 MUTE BUTTON
7 ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS
Selects the input in Zone 2. When an input is selected, an amber
LED lights on the corresponding input selection button. When
Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input selection button
activates Zone 2 and selects the corresponding input. The Main
and Record Zones remain deactivated until a Main or Record Zone
input is selected.
8 RECORD ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS
Selects an input in the Record Zone. When an input is selected, a
red LED lights on the corresponding input selection button. When
the Record Zone is deactivated, pressing a Record Zone input
2-4
Press the Mute button to mute the SDP-40HD Main Zone volume;
"MUTE ON" appears in the on-screen and front panel displays.
Press the Mute button again to restore the SDP-40HD volume to its
original level. Under VOLUME CONTROL SETUP, the MUTE LEVEL
parameter can be used to set mute levels.
Mute can be activated automatically or manually. For example, the
SDP-40HD briefly activates mute when changing input sources or
listening modes. The amber LED on the Mute button lights
whenever mute is activated.
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW
The SDP-40HD is shown below. The numbers in the rear-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items.
3
2
4
5
8
7
6
9 10
11
MAIN
AUDIO
OUTPUTS
1
L
20
19
FRONT
R
CENTER
18
LFE
L
SUBWOOFER R
L
SIDE
R
L
17 16 15
REAR
R
L
14
AUX
R
L
ZONE 2
R
13
1. S-video Input Connectors
8. Record Zone Video Output Connectors
2. Composite Video Input Connectors
9. IR In Connector
3. Component Video Input Connectors
10. Removable Access Panel
4. HDMI Input Connectors
11. Power Switch
5. HDMI Output Connector
12. AC Input Connector
6. Main Video Output Connectors
13. Record Zone Audio Output Connectors
7. Zone 2 Audio Output Connectors
14. RS-232 Connectors
12
2-5
Basic Operation
JBL
15. Main Audio Output Connectors
4 HDMI INPUT CONNECTORS
16. Microphone Input Connectors
Provides HDMI audio/video input to the Main Zone (not available for
the Record Zone). Six HDMI connectors labeled HDMI 1 to 6 are
available.
17. Trigger Output Connectors
18. Digital Audio Input Connectors (AES/EBU, S/PDIF, & OMJ)
19. Balanced Audio Output Connectors
Note:
20. Analog Audio Input Connectors
A DVI (Digital Visual Interface) device can be connected to the
SDP-40HD through a DVI-to-HDMI cable or adaptor. DVI carries video
but no audio.
CAUTION!
Never make or break connections to the SDP-40HD unless
the SDP-40HD and all associated components are powered
off.
1 S-VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
5 HDMI OUTPUT CONNECTOR
Provides HDMI output from the Main Zone. One HDMI output
connector is available. The HDMI OUT connector supports HDCP
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
Provides video input to the Main and Record Zones. Three S-video
connectors labeled S-VIDEO 1 to 3 are available.
Note:
2 COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
A DVI (Digital Visual Interface) device can be connected to the
SDP-40HD through a DVI-to-HDMI cable or adaptor. The DVI device
must be HDCP compliant.
Provides video input to the Main and Record Zones. Two
composite video connectors labeled VIDEO 1 and 2 are available.
3 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
Provides video input to the Main Zone. Four sets of component
video connectors (three RCA and one BNC) labeled INPUT 1 to 4
are available. The component video connectors are not available for
the Record Zone.
6 MAIN VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provides video output from the Main Zone. Two composite video
connectors, two S-video connectors, and one set of component
video connectors (BNC) are available. The composite and S-video
connectors labeled 1 (OSD), and the component video connectors
incorporate the on-screen display.
Composite video output is available when a composite or S-video
source is present.
S-video output is available when an S-video source is present.
2-6
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
Component video output is available when a component,
composite, or S-video source is present.
Note:
The video outputs that incorporate the on-screen display (OSD) can
also display the two-line status. However, to view the two-line status
through the component output, it must be configured to convert and
display composite or S-video. See “COMPONENT IN” on page
page 12.
CAUTION!
Never make or break connections to the SDP-40HD unless
the SDP-40HD and all associated components are powered
off.
10 REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL
Covers the expansion slot, which is reserved for emerging
technologies.
11 POWER SWITCH
The Power Switch disconnects power from the AC Input Connector
(12) to the product. The I and O positions represent “on” and “off”
status, respectively. When the SDP-40HD is powered on, the frontpanel Standby button or remote control On button can be used to
activate and deactivate standby mode. When the SDP-40HD is
powered off, standby mode is not available.
7 ZONE 2 AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
12 AC INPUT CONNECTOR
Provides analog audio output from Zone 2. Two sets of stereo
connectors are available. The connectors labeled “Fix” pass audio
at fixed output levels. The connectors labeled “Var” pass audio at
variable output levels and include a built-in volume control.
Provides power to the SDP-40HD through the supplied power cord.
8 RECORD ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provides video output from the Record Zone. Two composite video
connectors and two S-video connectors are available. These
connectors can be used to connect a monitor or video recording
device.
9 IR IN CONNECTOR
Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment.
One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/Ring/Sleeve
connection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is available.
13 RECORD ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provides analog and digital audio output from the Record Zone.
Two stereo connectors labeled Audio L/R output analog audio. The
connector labeled “Fix” passes audio at a fixed output level. The
connector labeled “Var” passes audio at variable output levels and
includes a built-in volume control. Two S/PDIF connectors (one
coaxial and one optical) output digital audio.
These connectors can be used to connect a recording device. When
the Record Zone audio output connector labeled Var is connected
to a recording device, you should set the volume to +0dB to
achieve appropriate recording levels. See “REC PWR ON” on page
page 55 for more information.
2-7
Basic Operation
REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW
JBL
18 DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS
(AES/EBU & S/PDIF)
(continued)
The RS-232 serial connector (1) is used to perform backup and
restoration of configuration files and flash memory software
upgrades. The RS-232 connector (2) is capable of supporting
future developments.
Provides digital audio input to all zones. One AES/EBU (XLR), six S/
PDIF coaxial (RCA), and six S/PDIF TOSLINKTM optical input
connectors are available. These connectors are compatible with
PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz), Dolby Digital, and DTS-ES
sources. These connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3
sources.
15 MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
19 BALANCED AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provides analog audio output from the Main Zone. Ten connectors
labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, Subwoofer L/R, Side L/R, and Rear L/
R are available. Two connectors labeled Aux L/R are provided for
future expansion.
Provides balanced analog audio outputs in the Main Zone and
Zone 2. Ten connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, Subwoofer
L/R, Side L/R, and Rear L/R are available in the Main Zone. The
connectors labeled Aux L/R are provided for future expansion. Two
connectors labeled Zone 2 L/R are available for Zone 2.
14 RS-232 CONNECTORS
16 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTORS
Provides microphone input.
connectors are available.
Four
3.5mm
20 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS
Tip/Ring/Sleeve
17 TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provides 12V DC output to control connected components. Three
trigger output connectors are available on a removable terminal
block. The PWR connector – the power trigger output connector –
cannot be configured. It is activated when the SDP-40HD is
activated, and deactivated when the SDP-40HD is deactivated. The
trigger output connectors (1) and (2) can be configured for remote
or program operation.
2-8
Provides analog audio input. Eight stereo analog audio input
connectors labeled 1 to 8 are available. Connectors labeled 6, 7
and 8 can be configured as 5.1-channel connectors.
When a 5.1-channel analog audio source is present in the Main
Zone input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output
connectors as indicated in the table on the following page. If the
ANALOG BYPASS is ON, a 5.1-channel analog source is present in
the Main Zone, and the INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD
IN parameter is set to DMIX, only the (L) and (R) input signals are
sent to the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors.
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW
Input Connector
Output Connector
(L) & (R)
Front L/ R
(C)
Center
(SUB)
Subwoofer L/R & LFE
(LS) & (RS)
Side L/R and Rear L/R
The SDP-40HD remote control provides full operation of the
SDP-40HD, including commands such as menu navigation that are
not available from the front-panel. The command matrix, beginning
on page 2-1100, indicates the commands that remote control
buttons perform when each command bank is active. The numbered
items in the matrix correspond with the remote control illustrations.
OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS
The following factors can improve or impede remote control
operation.
Note the following before operating the SDP-40HD remote control:
•
The remote control must be in line of sight with the frontpanel IR receiver. Eliminate obstructions between the remote
control and the IR receiver. The remote control may become
unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR
receiver.
•
For optimal performance, position the remote control at a 30
degree angle no more than 17 feet (5m) from the SDP-40HD.
Placing the SDP-40HD inside a smoked glass cabinet will
reduce the remote control range.
•
Remote controls for different components can interfere with
one another. Avoid using remote controls for different components at the same time.
•
Remote control batteries should be replaced as needed.
2-9
Basic Operation
COMMAND BANK ACTIVATION
Remote control buttons perform different commands depending on
whether the Main Zone, Zone 2, Record Zone, or Shift command
bank is activated. Pressing and releasing a remote control command
bank selection button – MAIN, ZONE, REC, or SHIFT – activates the
corresponding command bank. The selected command bank
remains active until another command bank is activated.
The command bank selection buttons themselves do not send
commands to the SDP-40HD. When pressed and released, these
buttons activate the corresponding command bank. For example,
pressing and releasing the SHIFT button activates the Shift
command bank. When the Shift command bank is activated,
pressing and releasing the DVD-1 button turns off the Main Zone.
See Command Matrix, page 2-11.
To activate a command bank:
1. Press and release a command bank selection button to activate
the desired command bank.
The command matrix that begins on the next page indicates
which commands the remote control buttons perform when
each command bank is activated.
2. Press a remote control button to send a command to the
SDP-40HD.
2-10
JBL
The MAIN MENUSETUPDISPLAYSON-SCREEN DISPLAY
menu REMOTE STATE parameter controls the remote control
command bank indicator that appears on the on-screen display.
When the REMOTE STATE parameter is set to ON, a command
bank indicator appears in the top-right corner of the on-screen
display to indicate the last command bank from which the
SDP-40HD received a command. A “Z” appears to indicate Zone 2.
An “R” appears to indicate the Record Zone. An “S” appears to
indicate the Shift command bank. No letter appears when the Main
Zone command bank is active. When the REMOTE STATE
parameter is set to OFF, no command bank indicator appears on
the on-screen display.
Note:
Remote control command bank selection buttons should not be pressed
and held.
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
COMMAND MATRIX
The numbers in the remote control illustrations correspond to the
numbered items in the matrix. The sections following the
2
3
1
Button
LIGHT
MAIN
ZONE
1
REC
SHIFT
DVD-1
DVD-2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
MODE
BLUE
VOL
STAT
Zone 2
Record Zone
Shift
Activates and deactivates standby mode when the SDP-40HD rear panel power switch is in the on position.
When standby mode is activated, pressing the standby button deactivates standby mode and activates the
SDP-40HD, including all zones that were activated during the previous operating session. When standby
mode is deactivated, pressing the standby button activates standby mode and deactivates the SDP-40HD. The
red front panel standby button LED lights to indicate that standby mode is activated.
2
Activates the remote control back-light, illuminating remote control buttons to make them more visible in the
dark. The back-light also illuminates whenever a remote control button is pressed. Once illuminated, the backlight remains on for about 5 seconds before extinguishing.
3
Activates the Main Zone command bank, which includes commands that control the Main Zone.
Activates the Zone 2 command bank, which includes commands that control Zone 2 and the Main Zone.
MUTE
MENU
7/5
Main Zone
Note: Power is still supplied to the SDP-40HD when standby mode is activated.
4
FP
OSD
command matrix provide a more detailed explanation of the
functionality and menu structure of the digital controller that can
be accessed through the remote control.
Activates the Record Zone command bank, which includes commands that control the Record Zone.
Activates the Shift command bank, which includes commands that control all zones.
2 CH
MUSIC
4
Selects the DVD1 input
for the Main Zone.
Selects the DVD1 input
for Zone 2.
Selects the DVD1 input
for the Record Zone.
Deactivates the Main Zone.
Selects the DVD2 input
for the Main Zone.
Selects the DVD2 input
for Zone 2.
Selects the DVD2 input
for the Record Zone.
Deactivates Zone 2.
Selects the LD input for
the Main Zone.
Selects the LD input for
Zone 2.
Selects the LD input for
the Record Zone.
Deactivates the Record
Zone.
Selects the TV input for
the Main Zone.
Selects the TV input for
Zone 2.
Selects the TV input for
the Record Zone.
Sets the AUDIO CONTROLS
menu LOUDNESS parameter
to ON.
2-11
Basic Operation
JBL
Button
LIGHT
MAIN
4
ZONE
REC
Main Zone
Zone 2
Record Zone
Shift
Selects the SAT input for Selects the SAT input for Selects the SAT input for Sets the AUDIO CONthe Main Zone.
Zone 2.
the Record Zone.
TROLS menu LOUDNESS parameter to OFF.
SHIFT
DVD-1
DVD-2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
MODE
BLUE
VOL
OSD
MUTE
MENU
7/5
2 CH
MUSIC
Selects the CD input for Selects the CD input for Selects the CD input for Increases the AUDIO
the Main Zone.
for Zone 2.
the Record Zone.
CONTROLS menu BASS
parameter in 0.5dB
increments.
Selects the PVR input for Selects the PVR input for Selects the PVR input for Increases the AUDIO
the Main Zone.
Zone 2.
the Record Zone.
CONTROLS menu TREBLE parameter in 0.5dB
increments.
Selects the GAME input Selects the GAME input Selects the GAME input Increases the AUDIO
for the Main Zone.
for Zone 2.
for the Record Zone.
CONTROLS menu TILT
EQ parameter in 0.2dB
increments.
Selects the TAPE input
for the Main Zone.
Selects the TAPE input
for Zone2.
Selects the TAPE input
for the Record Zone.
Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu BASS
parameter in 0.5dB
increments.
Selects the TUNER input Selects the TUNER input Selects the TUNER input Decreases the AUDIO
for the Main Zone.
for Zone 2.
for the Record Zone.
CONTROLS menu TREBLE parameter in 0.5dB
increments.
Selects the AUX input
for the Main Zone.
2-12
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
4
FP
STAT
Selects the VCR input for Selects the VCR input for Selects the VCR input
the Main Zone.
Zone 2.
for the Record Zone.
Selects the AUX input
for Zone 2.
Selects the AUX input
for the Record Zone.
Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu TILT
EQ parameter in 0.2dB
increments.
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
Button
LIGHT
MAIN
ZONE
REC
DVD-2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
5
6
FP
8
MODE
BLUE
VOL
Record Zone
Shift
Sets Zone 2 volume
Toggles the FRONT
level to -15dB
PANEL DISPLAY menu
STATUS parameter
between ALWAYS OFF
and the current setting.
Sets Record Zone volume level to -15dB
Sets Main Zone volume
level to -15dB.
6
Toggles the ON SCREEN
DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter
between ON and OFF.
Sets Zone 2 volume
level to -30dB
Sets Record Zone volume level to -30dB
Sets Main Zone volume
level to -30dB.
7
Toggles the ON SCREEN Reserved for possible
DISPLAY menu STATUS future expansion.
parameter between
ALWAYS OFF and the
current setting.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Sets the AUDIO CONTROL menu BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ
parameters to +0.0dB.
However, the screen displays:
EQ BALANCE
EQ OFF
8
Scroll to the previous or
next available listening
mode, with the current
Main Zone input source.
Scrolling occurs in the
order shown on the
MODE ADJUST menu.
Activates (+) and deactivates (-) the trigger output connector labeled 2
when the connector is
configured for remote
operation.
Deactivates (+) and activates (-) standby mode
when the SDP-40HD is
powered on with the rear
panel power switch.
9
Increases and decreases Increases and decreases Increases and decreases Increases and decreases
Main Zone volume level
Main Zone volume level Zone 2 volume level in Record Zone volume
level in 1dB increments. in 3dB increments.
1dB increments.
in 1dB increments.
10
Toggles between lowering Main Zone volume
level and restoring Main
Zone volume to the
original level.
9
OSD
7
STAT
Zone 2
5
SHIFT
DVD-1
Main Zone
MUTE
10
MENU
7/5
2 CH
MUSIC
Activates (+) and deactivates (-) the trigger output connector labeled 1
when the connector is
configured for remote
operation.
Toggles between full
Zone 2 muting and
restoring Zone 2 volume to the original
level.
Toggles between full
Record Zone muting
and restoring Record
Zone volume to the
original level.
Toggles between full
Main Zone muting and
restoring Main Zone volume to the original level.
2-13
Basic Operation
JBL
Button
LIGHT
MAIN
ZONE
REC
DVD-2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
MODE
BLUE
12
STAT
When a menu is open,
pressing the MENU button closes the structure.
When no menus are
open, pressing the
MENU button opens the
MAIN MENU.
Centers the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu
ZONE2 BALANCE
parameter.
Centers the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu
RECORD BALANCE
parameter.
Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone
BALANCE and FADER
parameters.
13
Closes the current ()
menu or opens the
menu structure and
selects the highlighted
menu item ().
Adjusts the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu
ZONE2 BALANCE
parameter left and right.
Adjusts the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu
RECORD BALANCE
parameter left and
right.
Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone
BALANCE parameters left
and right.
Scroll upward and
downward through
menu items.
Reserved for possible
Increase and decrease
subwoofer output levels future expansion.
applied to the current
listening mode.
MUTE
MENU
7/5
13
2 CH
Shift
12
OSD
13
14
VOL
Record Zone
Displays the Main Zone Displays the Zone 2
Displays the Record
two-line status for 2 sec- two-line status for 2 sec- Zone two-line status
onds.
onds.
for 2 seconds.
FP
11
Zone 2
11
SHIFT
DVD-1
Main Zone
15
Opens and closes the status menu for the current
input source.
Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu Main Zone
FADER parameters forward () and backward
().
MUSIC
2-14
14
Toggles between 7channel and 5-channel
playback.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Reserved for possible Adjusts the MAIN ADV
future expansion.
menu INPUT SELECT
parameter, cycling
through the ANALOG,
DIGITAL, and AUTO settings.
15
Reserved for possible
Toggles between the
current listening mode future expansion.
and the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.
Reserved for possible Toggles the MAIN ADV
future expansion.
menu ANALOG BYPASS
parameter between ON
and OFF.
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
Button
LIGHT
MAIN
ZONE
16
REC
SHIFT
DVD-1
DVD-2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
MODE
BLUE
Main Zone
Zone 2
Record Zone
Shift
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Activates the THX UL2Cin
or the THX SurEX listening mode when a
5.1-channel Dolby Digital
source is present.
Selects the Dolby mode Reserved for possible
future expansion.
family for the current
input source.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Activates the Dolby Digital EX or Dolby Digital
listening mode when a
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source is present.
Selects the LOGIC 7 FILM Reserved for possible
mode family for the cur- future expansion.
rent input source.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Activates the PANORAMA listening mode.
Selects the LOGIC 7 TV Reserved for possible
mode family for the cur- future expansion.
rent input source.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Activates the MONO
LOGIC listening mode
for 2-channel sources
and the 5.1 MONO
LOGIC listening mode
for 5.1 channel Dolby
Digital sources.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
When a DTS(-ES) source
is present, pressing the
dts button toggles the
ES DECODING parameter, cycling through the
AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.
Reserved for possible
Selects the LOGIC 7
MUSIC mode family for future expansion.
the current input source.
Reserved for possible
future expansion.
Activates the L7 MUSIC
SURR listening mode.
Selects the THX mode
family for the current
input source.
FP
VOL
OSD
STAT
MUTE
MENU
7/5
2 CH
16
MUSIC
Selects the DTS mode
family for the current
input source.
2-15
Basic Operation
JBL
MENU NAVIGATION
Use the remote control Menu and arrow buttons to navigate the
extensive menu structure shown in the Appendix. The table below
indicates the navigation commands that the remote control
buttons perform when the Main Zone command bank is activated.
Button
MAIN MENU
The MAIN MENU represents the
beginning of the menu structure. Use
the MAIN MENU to open the three main
menu branches: MODE ADJUST, AUDIO
CONTROLS, and SETUP.
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
Navigation Function(s)
• When no menus are displayed, press the MENU button to open the MAIN MENU.
• When a menu is open, press the MENU button to close the menu structure.
• When no menus are displayed, press the arrow button to open the MAIN MENU.
• When a menu is open, press the arrow button to select the highlighted menu item.
• When a menu is open, press the arrow button to close the menu and, in most cases, open the previous
menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN
MENU is closed. When the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.
• When no menus are displayed, pressing the arrow button performs no function.
• When a drop-down menu is open, press the arrow button to select the current setting and close the dropdown menu.
•
When a menu is open, press the or arrow buttons to scroll upward or downward through the complete
list of menu items. All menu items are displayed on-screen. A scroll bar appears on the left side of the menu
when menu items exceed the top and bottom margins of the display, and the cursor automatically advances
to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed. The highlighted menu item is displayed on
the SDP-40HD front panel.
MENU ITEM SELECTION
2-16
Use the remote control Menu arrows to select menu items.
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
To select a menu item:
1. Press the remote control or arrow buttons to highlight the
desired menu item.
2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the arrow
button to select the highlighted item. If you select an option,
another menu displays. If you select a parameter, a parameter
menu or horizontal graph opens.
PARAMETER DROP-DOWN MENUS
When certain menu parameters are selected, a drop-down menu
opens with a list of available parameter settings. For example,
selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu CUSTOM NAME parameter
opens a drop-down menu for selecting the ON or OFF setting.
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
MENU OPTIONS
Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu
structure. For example, selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens
the SETUP menu.
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
LOCK OPTIONS
ON
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
To select a setting in a parameter drop-down menu:
1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote control
or arrow button to scroll up or down through the complete list of available settings. The current setting is displayed
beneath the parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel
displays.
2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter
name, press the arrow button to accept the setting and
close the drop-down menu.
MENU PARAMETERS
Selecting a menu parameter opens a drop-down menu or
horizontal bar graph that is used to select the desired setting.
2-17
Basic Operation
JBL
HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHS
Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph. The
bar graph indicates the position of the current parameter setting
within the entire parameter range. The setting appears to the right of
the parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel displays.
For example, selecting the DISPLAY SETUP menu A/V SYNC DELAY
parameter opens the horizontal bar graph shown below, which is
used to adjust the amount of audio delay.
DISPLAY SETUP
OFF, 1 to 60ms
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:
1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote control or arrow button to increase or decrease the setting in
designated increments.
The setting appears to the right of the parameter name in the
on-screen and front-panel displays.
2. When you have finished adjusting the settings, press the arrow
button to select the current setting and close the horizontal bar
graph.
2-18
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
ABOUT THE ZONES
The SDP-40HD features three zones of operation: the Main Zone,
Zone 2, and the Record Zone. The Main Zone controls audio and
video sources in the primary listening space. Zone 2 controls
audio sources in the secondary listening space. The Record Zone
controls audio and video sources sent to recording devices or to a
third listening space.
These zones have separate digital audio receivers and dedicated
analog source selectors that allow for independent input
selection in each zone. The SDP-40HD can process input sources
in three zones at the same time. For example, the SDP-40HD can
play a DVD in the Main Zone, while playing a CD in Zone 2,
while sending satellite receiver signals to a VCR in the Record
Zone.
•
The MAIN MENUSETUPINPUTSINPUT SETUP
menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD IN parameter is set to
DMIX.
3. When the MAIN MENUSETUPINPUTSINPUT SETUP
menu ZONE2 IN or RECORD IN parameter is set to ANLG, the
Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors are not available during 5.1mc BYPASS listening mode. However, it is possible to have a 5.1-channel analog audio source present in the
Main Zone and a digital audio source present in Zone 2 or the
Record Zone.
4. When an HDMI source is selected for digital audio input, the
down-mixed audio is available on the digital audio output in
the Record Zone. When the source on the HDMI connector is
copy-protected DVD-Audio, no digital audio is output, but
analog audio is still output.
The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:
1. When a Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) source is present in the
Main Zone, the same Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) source can
also be present in Zone 2 or the Record Zone. However, a different Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) source cannot be present in
Zone 2 or the Record Zone.
2. Main Zone multi-channel audio can be down-mixed in Zone 2
or the Record Zone when all of the following conditions are
met:
•
A Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) source is present in the Main
Zone.
•
The Main Zone input is also selected in Zone 2 or the
Record Zone. For example, if the DVD1 input is selected
in the Main Zone, the DVD1 input must also be selected
in Zone 2 or the Record Zone.
2-19
Basic Operation
TWO-LINE STATUS
The two-line status opens on the on-screen and front panel displays
whenever the SDP-40HD detects a status change such as a new
input source or listening mode. The information included on the
two-line status differs depending on the zone in which the
SDP-40HD last detected a status change.
MAIN ZONE TWO-LINE STATUS
Opens on the on-screen and front panel DVD1
D
VOL
displays whenever the Main Zone status
FILM
-34dB
changes. The Main Zone two-line status
indicates the current input, listening mode, input source, and
volume level selected in the Main Zone.
ZONE 2 TWO-LINE STATUS
Opens on the on-screen and front panel DVD1
D
VOL
displays whenever the Zone 2 status changes. ZONE 2
-34dB
The Zone 2 two-line status indicates the
current input, input source, and volume level selected in Zone 2.
RECORD ZONE TWO-LINE STATUS
Opens on the on-screen and front panel DVD1
D
VOL
displays whenever the Record Zone status RECORD
-34dB
changes. The Record Zone two-line status
indicates the current input, input source, and volume level selected
in the Record Zone.
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter controls how
long the two-line status appears on the on-screen display. The
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu POSITION parameter controls the
2-20
JBL
vertical alignment of the two-line status on the display device
screen.
Notes:
• When the display device is connected to a component video output
connector and the ADVANCED menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is
set to OFF, the display device does not show the on-screen display,
including the two-line status.
• The two-line status displays on the component video output only when
VIDEO IN is set to composite or S-video and COMPONENT IN is set to
VIDEO.
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
STATUS MENUS
The STATUS menu contains parameters that provide information about
the current input source and listening mode. Status menus are available
for HDMI, 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), analog, and digital input
sources.
All status menus include the letter “S” at the top right corner.
Certain status menus also include level meters that indicate
fluctuating audio input levels. Some status menus have more
information than can fit on one screen, or page. These status
menus have two or three pages, and are identified by the caret (>)
near the top right corner.
D STATUS
> S
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
EX ENCODED
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
C
R
SL SR
LFE
D STATUS
S
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
-45
If HDMI audio or video is active, the HDMI status menu will appear
before other status menus.
HDMI STATUS
HDMI CONNECTOR
VID FMT
VERT RATE
AUD IN
AUDIO FMT
CHANNELS
SAMPLE RATE
HDCP STATUS
> S
D STATUS
> S
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
EX ENCODED
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
C
R
SL SR
LFE
S
D STATUS
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
-45
Unlike most other menus, status menus cannot be opened by
selecting menu options. The remote control command sequence
outlined below must be executed.
To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input
source:
1. Press and release the remote control SHIFT button.
2. Press and release the remote control STAT button.
The first page of the STATUS menu for the current input source
appears in the on-screen and front-panel displays.
3. If the > indicator appears near the top right corner of the
menu, press and release the STAT button again to open the
second page. Press and release the STAT button again to open
the third page (if one exists).
If the STATUS menu does not include a second or third page, pressing and releasing the STAT button again closes the menu.
Note:
When viewing a STATUS menu on the front panel display, press the
remote control MAIN button, then press the or arrow button to
scroll up or down through the list of available parameters.
2-21
Basic Operation
4. Press the STAT button to close the STATUS menu. In some
cases, you must press STAT twice in succession to close the
STATUS menu.
JBL
STATUS MENU DESCRIPTIONS
The table beneath each description lists the possible settings for
each parameter.
Note:
HDMI STATUS
STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current
input source and listening mode. These parameters cannot be
adjusted.
Provides information about HDMI input sources. VID FMT is the
video format. VERT RATE is the vertical scan rate frequency.
Parameter
Possible Settings
STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS
HDMI CONNECTOR
1–6
Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating
input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround left
(SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB) and low frequency effects
(LFE) channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both analog
and digital input sources. For example, the level meters indicate digital
audio input levels when a digital audio source is present.
VID FMT (video format)
480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, ---
Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS
menu, depending on the current source. The SB level meter appears
when a 6.1-channel source or a 5.1-channel source is present and
the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red
when the on-screen display is configured for a blue screen
background. Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal
levels, and red indicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level
meters appear in white when the on-screen display is not
configured for a blue screen background.
2-22
VERT RATE (vertical scan rate) 60Hz, 50Hz, 59.94Hz, --AUD IN
HDMI, OPTICAL1–6, COAX1–6,
ANALOG, 5.1 ANLG (6–8)
AUDIO FMT
DD, DTS, PCM, N/A
CHANNELS
6.1, 5.1, 5.0, 2.1, 2.0, 1.0, N/A
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, N/A
HDCP STATUS
ACTIVE, INACTIVE, ERROR
See “Status Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 27 for detailed information.
HDMI STATUS
HDMI CONNECTOR
VID FMT
VERT RATE
AUD IN
AUDIO FMT
CHANNELS
SAMPLE RATE
HDCP STATUS
> S
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
2CH STATUS
D STATUS
Provides information about 2-channel input sources. Features L and
R level meters.
Parameter
Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources. Features L,
C, R, SL, SR, SB, and LFE level meters.
Possible Settings
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT
Current input
INPUT
Current input
MODE
Current listening mode
MODE
Current listening mode
INPUT TYPE
ANLG, PCM
CHANNELS
3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
BIT RATE
32 to 640kbps
EX ENCODED
YES, NO
SAMPLE RATE
48kHz
2.0 ENCODING
MATRIX, NONE
DIALOG OFFSET
-27 to +4dB
MIX ROOM
SMALL, LARGE
CENTER MIX LVL
-3.0dB, -4.5dB, -6.0dB
SURR MIX LVL
+0.0dB, -3.0dB, -6.0dB
See “Status Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 27 for detailed information.
2CH STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
-45
S
R
See “Status Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 27 for detailed information.
D STATUS
> S
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
EX ENCODED
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
C
R
SL SR
LFE
D STATUS
S
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
-45
2-23
Basic Operation
JBL
STATUS
5.1mc STATUS
Provides information about DTS(-ES) input sources. Includes L, C, R,
SL, SR, SB and LFE level meters.
Parameter
Provides information about 5.1-channel sources. Includes L, C, R,
SL, SR, and LFE level meters.
Possible Settings
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT
Current input
INPUT
Current input
MODE
Current listening mode
MODE
Current listening mode
CHANNELS
3/3.1, 3/2.1
INPUT TYPE
ANLG, PCM
BIT RATE
754.5 to 1509.7kbps
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 96kHz
ES ENCODING
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF
WORD LENGTH
16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
See “Status Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 27 for detailed information.
> S
STATUS
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
ENCODING
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
-45
C
R
SL SR SB LFE
STATUS
STATUS
WORD
WORD LENGTH
LENGTH
SAMPLE
SAMPLE RATE
RATE
S
Note:
The only possible sample rate for 5.1 analog sources is 96kHz, as they
are converted to 96kHz PCM at the SDP-40HD input (when MAIN
ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF).
See “Status Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 27 for detailed information.
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
-45
2-24
S
5.1mc STATUS
C
R
SL SR
STATUS
WORD LENGTH
SAMPLE RATE
LFE
PG1
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
2CH BYPASS STATUS
Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources when
the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.
Provides information about 2-channel analog input sources when
the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.
Parameter
Possible Settings
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT
Current input
INPUT
Current input
MODE
5.1a BYPASS
MODE
2CH BYPASS
INPUT TYPE
BYPASS
INPUT TYPE
BYPASS
See “Status Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 27 for detailed information.
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
S
See “Status Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 27 for detailed information.
2CH BYPASS STATUS
S
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
2-25
Basic Operation
JBL
DIGITAL STATUS
Provides information about digital input sources for which a sample
rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input signal.
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT
Current input
MODE
Current listening mode
INPUT TYPE
---
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
See “Status Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 27 for detailed information.
DIGITAL STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
2-26
S
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
2.0 ENCODING
MATRIX, NONE
Indicates whether a matrix encoded source is detected. When the
parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix encoded source is detected.
When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix encoded source is
not detected.
AUD IN
HDMI, OPTICAL-1 to 6, COAX-1 to 6,
ANALOG, 5.1 ANLG (6-8)
Displays the audio input connector that is selected as the active
input.
AUDIO FMT
DD, DTS, PCM, ---
Displays the type of audio present at the selected active digital
audio input.
BIT RATE
32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps
Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit rate
indicates that less compression was used during the encoding process.
Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to 640 kbps.
Possible settings for DTS(-ES) sources range from 754 to 1509.7kbps.
CENTER MIX LVL
CHANNELS
3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0
Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The
first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit
after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.
The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (low
frequency effects) information.
Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,
3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0 and 1/0. Current settings for DTS-ES input
sources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.
DIALOG OFFSET
-27 to +4dB
Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.
Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below
full-scale (-27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the
incoming signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter
indicates the amount of adjustment the SDP-40HD makes to
normalize dialog to -27dBFS.
ES ENCODING
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF
Indicates whether or not a DTS-ES encoded source is detected.
When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel
DTS-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,
a 5.1-channel DTS-ES source with a surround encoded back
channel is detected. When the parameter setting is OFF, a standard
DTS source with no DTS-ES encoding is detected.
-3.0dB, -4.5dB, -6.0dB
Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used
during the mixing process.
EX ENCODED
YES, NO
Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded
source is detected. When the parameter setting is yes, a
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital
Surround EX is detected. When the parameter setting is NO, a
2-27
Basic Operation
SDP-40HD
standard 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby.
Digital Surround EX encoding is detected. The SDP-40HD cannot
automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in
non-flagged input sources.
SAMPLE RATE
HDCP STATUS
Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during
the mixing process.
ACTIVE, INACTIVE, ERROR
Indicates the current HDCP status of the media present at the
active HDMI input.
HDMI CONNECTOR
1-6
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.
SURR MIX LVL
VERT RATE
+0.0dB, -3.0dB, -6.0dB
60Hz, 50Hz, 59.94Hz, ---
Indicates the HDMI connector selected as the active HDMI input.
Indicates the vertical timing rate for the active video format being
carried on HDMI.
INPUT
VID FMT
Indicates the selected input (for example, DVD1).
Indicates the active video format of the media present at the active
HDMI input.
INPUT TYPE
ANLG, BYPASS, PCM, ---
Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter
setting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the
ADVANCED menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF. When
the parameter setting is BYPASS, a 2-channel analog audio source is
present and the ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. When
the parameter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio source is
present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknown digital
audio source is present.
MIX ROOM
WORD LENGTH
720P, 1080I, ---
16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits
Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal.
SMALL, LARGE
Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the mixing
process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, you should set the
RE-EQUALIZER parameter to ON for THX listening modes.
MODE
Indicates the activated listening mode (e.g., L7 FILM).
2-28
3
Setup
Setup .........................................................................................3-2
Input Setup ................................................................................3-3
Changing Input Names ............................................................................ 3-4
Assigning HDMI, Audio and Video Input Connectors ............................... 3-6
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes ....................................................... 3-13
Configuring Advanced Input Settings ..................................................... 3-19
INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings .......................................................... 3-21
ZONE2 & RECORD IN Parameter Settings .............................................. 3-24
Speaker Setup ..........................................................................3-27
Calibrating Speaker Distances & Output Levels ........................3-39
Speaker Calibration Parameters .............................................................. 3-39
LEVELS Calibration ................................................................................. 3-40
Rear-Panel Configuration .........................................................3-47
Display Setup ...........................................................................3-49
On-Screen Display ................................................................................. 3-51
Front-Panel Display ................................................................................ 3-53
Volume Control Setup ..............................................................3-54
Trigger Setup ...........................................................................3-56
Lock Options ............................................................................3-59
Setup
JBL
SETUP
Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DISPLAYS
SETUP
DISPLAYS
Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, to customize the on-screen and
front-panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization, and
create and activate a custom unit name. See “DISPLAY SETUP” on
page 3-49 for more information.
VOLUME CONTROLS
INPUTS
SETUP
SETUP
INPUTS
Prompts for an input selection (e.g., DVD1), and opens the
corresponding INPUT SETUP menu. When the menu is open, you can
change input names, assign audio, HDMI, and video input
connectors, select preferred listening modes, and configure Main
Zone, Zone 2 and Record Zone settings. See “INPUT SETUP” on
page 3-3 for more information.
SPEAKERS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, to configure the Main Zone
audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup. See
“SPEAKER SETUP” on page 3-27 for more information.
REAR PANEL CONFIG
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
Opens the REAR PANEL CONFIG menu, to configure the analog audio input
connectors as eight stereo connectors or as five stereo and one 5.1-channel
connectors. See “REAR PANEL CONFIG” on page 3-47 for more
information.
3-2
VOLUME CONTROLS
Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, to configure Main Zone,
Zone 2, and Record Zone volume levels. See “Volume Control Setup” on
page 3-54 for more information.
TRIGGERS
SETUP
TRIGGERS
Prompts the selection of a desired trigger output connector (1 or 2)
and opens the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu for
configuration of remote or program operation. See “TRIGGER
SETUP” on page 3-56 for more information.
LOCK OPTIONS
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, to protect MODE ADJUST,
AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch settings from
accidental changes. See “LOCK OPTIONS” on page 3-59 for more
information.
Setup
SDP-40HD
INPUT SETUP
SETUP
INPUTS
(INPUT)
INPUT SETUP
Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding
INPUT SETUP menu, which changes input names, assigns audio and video input connectors, selects preferred listening modes, and configures
advanced Main Zone, Zone 2, and Record Zone settings.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DVD1
1
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
NOTE: The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT
SETUP menu can be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input can be substituted.
All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-7. The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical,
regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. The INPUT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix
indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.
3-3
Setup
JBL
CHANGING INPUT NAMES
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu, to customize or restore the factory-default name of the selected
input. Factory-default input names correspond to front-panel and remote control input selection button labels.
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DVD1
1
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
DVD1 INPUT NAME
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
DVD1
>
MAIN MENU
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
DVD1 SETUP
INPUT
DVD2
DVD2
SAT
LD
VCR
TV
TV
SAT
CD
VCR
TUNER
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
EDIT INPUT NAME
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME editing menu, to customize the name
of the selected input. Custom input names can include up to eight
characters.
To customize the name of the selected input:
1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT
INPUT NAME editing menu.
2. When the editing menu opens, the current input name appears
on the second line. Use the remote control
and
arrow
buttons to change the character above the cursor (^).
3-4
3. When the character you want is displayed, press the
arrow
button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will
automatically wrap to the first character space when the last
character space is passed.
Note:
Pressing the arrow button closes the menu and returns to the INPUT
NAME menu.
Setup
SDP-40HD
CHANGING INPUT NAMES
(continued)
4. Repeat step 3 to enter all characters in the new name. When the
input name you want is displayed, press the arrow button to
close the menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1 SETUP
INPUT
DVD2
DVD1
SAT
DVD2
VCR
LD
TV
TV
CD
SAT
TUNER
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
NAME
The custom input name appears in the on-screen and front-panel
displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear
in the INPUT SETUP menu. The custom input name appears against
the left margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-defaul
input name appears in parentheses against the right margin.
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT NAME
NAME
HDMI IN
DVD1
1
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
PRESS MENU V TO
RESTORE INPUT NAME
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
To restore the factory-default name of the selected input:
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
Restores the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory
default input names correspond to front-panel and remote control
input selection button labels.
1. Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the
INPUT NAME menu.
2. When the INPUT NAME menu opens, press the remote control
or buttons to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option.
3. Press the arrow button to select this option. The message:
“PRESS MENU V TO RESTORE INPUT NAME” appears in the
on-screen and front-panel displays.
4. Press the button to restore the factory-default name and close
the message. (Press the button to close the message without
restoring the factory-default name of the selected input.)
3-5
Setup
JBL
ASSIGNING HDMI, AUDIO AND VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
The SDP-40HD has 12 inputs, to which any (depending on compatibility) of its 6 HDMI, 13 digital audio, 8 analog audio, 2 composite video,
3 S-video, or 4 component video input connectors can be assigned. The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be
used to assign audio and video input connectors. The ANLG IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust 2-channel and 5.1 analog audio input levels
for the selected input.
Parameter
Possible Settings
HDMI IN
HDMI-1 to 6, NONE
DIGITAL IN
HDMI AUDIO, COAX-1 to 6, OPTICAL-1 to 6,
AES/EBU, NONE
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (6-8), NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO, -18dB to +12dB
VIDEO IN
COMPOSITE-1 to 2, S-VIDEO-1 to 3, NONE
When HDMI IN is set to HDMI 1 to 6, and DIGITAL IN is set to HDMI
AUDIO, then only HDMI video (no audio) is active on the HDMI
output connector. The received HDMI audio is processed by the
SDP-40HD and is available on the analog audio outputs. See page
3-8 for details on the DIGITAL IN menu selections.
When HDMI IN is set to NONE, and DIGITAL IN is set to HDMI
AUDIO, then the COAX-1 connector is automatically assigned to
DIGITAL IN in place of any previously assigned HDMI connectors.
No audio or video is available on the HDMI output connector.
COMPONENT IN COMPONENT-1 to 4, VIDEO
Note:
The digital audio input connectors (including HDMI) are compatible
with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES)
sources. These connectors are not compatible with MPEG, MP3 or MP4.
When one of the HDMI inputs is selected and DIGITAL IN is set to a
parameter other than HDMI AUDIO, then both HDMI audio and
video are passed through the SDP-40HD (no processing occurs) to
the HDMI output connector.
Copyright protection system
HDMI IN
SETUP
INPUTS
HDMI-1 TO 6, NONE
DVD1
HDMI IN
Opens the HDMI IN menu, to assign an HDMI (High Definition
Multimedia Interface) input connector to the selected input.
The relationship between the HDMI inputs and HDMI analog and
digital outputs depends upon whether the HDMI IN parameter is set to
HDMI-1 to 6 or NONE, and also the setting of the DIGITAL IN
parameter. Refer to the table on page 3-7 during the following
explanation.
3-6
The SDP-40HD supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). HDCP is a copy protection technology that comprises
data encryption and authentication of associated equipment
connected through HDMI. All equipment connected to the
S D P -4 0 H D t h r o u g h H D M I m u s t s u p p o r t H D C P i f t h e
HDCP-protected content is to be displayed properly.
Setup
SDP-40HD
ASSIGNING HDMI, AUDIO AND VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
(continued)
The following table shows the behavior of the SDP-40HD relating to the HDMI inputs.
Inputs
HDMI
Outputs
Digital In
HDMI Output
Analog Audio Outputs
HDMI-1 to 6
HDMI AUDIO
HDMI video
HDMI digital audio
NONE
---- or COAX-1
No audio or video
Analog inputs (or COAX-1 if valid)
HDMI-1 to 6
NONE
HDMI audio and video
Analog inputs
HDMI-1 to 6
S/PDIF input (COAX or OPTICAL)
HDMI audio and video
S/PDIF input (if valid)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
DVD1 HDMI IN
DVD1
1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
HDMI-1
HDMI-2
HDMI-3
HDMI-4
HDMI-5
HDMI-6
NONE
5.1mc 5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
3-7
Setup
JBL
DIGITAL IN
SETUP
INPUTS
HDMI AUDIO, COAX-1 TO 6, OPTICAL-1 TO 6,
AES/EBU, NONE
When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the
SDP-40HD automatically sets the:
DVD1
•
•
•
DIGITAL IN
Opens the DIGITAL IN menu, to assign a digital audio input
connector to the selected input. A digital audio input connector must
be assigned if no analog audio input connector is assigned.
3-8
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT menu ZONE2 IN parameter to DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT menu RECORD IN parameter to DIGITAL
When the HDMI AUDIO parameter is selected an HDMI input must
also be selected (in the HDMI IN menu) or the HDMI audio will not
be available.
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
NAME
DVD1
HDMI IN
1
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DVD1 DIGITAL IN
HDMI AUDIO
COAX-1
COAX-2
COAX-3
COAX-4
COAX-5
COAX-6
OPTICAL-1
OPTICAL-2
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
OPTICAL-5
OPTICAL-6
AES/EBU
NONE
Setup
SDP-40HD
ASSIGNING HDMI, AUDIO & VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS (continued)
ANALOG IN
SETUP
INPUTS
ANALOG-1 TO 8, 5.1 ANLG (6-8), NONE
DVD1
ANALOG IN
Opens the ANALOG IN menu, to assign an analog audio input
connector to the selected input. An analog audio input connector
must be assigned if no digital audio input connector is assigned.
When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the
SDP-40HD automatically sets the:
•
MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter to ANALOG
•
INPUT SELECT menu ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG
•
INPUT SELECT menu RECORD IN parameter to ANLG
The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the
configuration of the analog audio input connectors.
•
The ANALOG IN menu (A below) appears when the REAR
PANEL CONFIG menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected.
•
The ANALOG IN menu (B below) appears when the REAR
PANEL CONFIG menu 5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG option is
selected.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 ANALOG IN
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
ANALOG-6
ANALOG-7
ANALOG-8
NONE
DVD1
HDMI-1
DIGITAL IN HDMI AUDIO
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
NONE
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
OR
DVD1 ANALOG IN
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
5.1 ANLG (6-8)
NONE
B
A
3-9
Setup
JBL
ANLG IN LVL
SETUP
INPUTS
AUTO, -18 to +12dB
DVD1
ANGL IN LVL
Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu, to adjust the 2-channel (and
5.1-channel when the MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS
parameter is set to OFF) analog audio input level for the selected
input. Analog audio sources have a wide range of levels. To
compensate, the SDP-40HD allows independent input level
adjustment of each stereo analog audio input connector. The input
level of the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector is only
adjustable when the ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF.
Parameter
Possible Settings
AUTO
ON, OFF
MANUAL
-18 to +12dB
AUTO GAIN*
-18 to +12dB
Adjustments made on the ANLG IN LVL menu are applied to the stereo
analog audio input connector assigned for the selected input. When
another stereo analog audio input connector is assigned, these
adjustments are automatically applied to the new connector.
AUTO
SETUP
ON, OFF
INPUTS
DVD1
ANGL IN LVL
AUTO
Provides automatic adjustment of the 2-channel (and 5.1-channel
when the MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to
OFF) analog audio input levels. When set to ON, the input levels are
automatically monitored and optimized. When the input signal is
too high, the input levels are quickly decreased to avoid overload.
When the input signal is too low, the input levels are slowly
increased to maximize the signal-to-noise ratio and dynamic range.
When set to OFF, the 2-channel and 5.1 analog audio input levels
are not automatically monitored and optimized. Instead, input
levels must be adjusted with the ANLG IN LVL MANUAL parameter.
* This parameter cannot be adjusted.
3-10
Note:
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DVD1
1
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
OFF
+0dB
AUTO
MANUAL
AUTO GAIN
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
-45
R
+0.0dB
ON
OFF
-18 to +12dB
Setup
SDP-40HD
ASSIGNING HDMI, AUDIO & VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS (continued)
MANUAL
SETUP
INPUTS
-18 to +12dB
DVD1
ANGL IN LVL
MANUAL
Provides manual adjustment of the 2-channel (and 5.1-channel
when the MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to
OFF) analog audio input levels. Lower levels cause more noise,
while higher levels pose a risk of overload distortion. When manual
adjustments are made, the SDP-40HD automatically sets the ANLG
IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF, deactivating automatic input
level adjustment. Manual input level adjustments are retained when
the AUTO parameter is ON.
Note:
When the AUTO parameter is ON, the SDP-40HD will not make
adjustments that exceed the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter
setting.
parameter indicates the amount of automatic input level
adjustment.
When AUTO GAIN is set to ON
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
ON
+0dB
AUTO
MANUAL
The AUTO parameter...
is reflected by the AUTO GAIN value
AUTO GAIN
+0.0dB
When the AUTO parameter is OFF, the AUTO GAIN parameter
indicates the amount of input level adjustment as set by the
MANUAL parameter.
When AUTO GAIN is set to OFF
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
AUTO GAIN
SETUP
INPUTS
AUTO
MANUAL
DVD1
ANGL IN LVL
OFF
+3dB
AUTO GAIN
Indicates the current amount of input level adjustment for the
selected 2-channel (and 5.1-channel when the MAIN ADVANCED
ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF) analog audio input
connector. This parameter cannot be directly adjusted. When the
ANLG IN LVL menu AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN
The MANUAL parameter...
is reflected by the AUTO GAIN value
AUTO GAIN
+3.0dB
When the AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter
continues to indicate the amount of manual input level adjustment
until automatic adjustments have been made.
LEVEL METERS
Indicate fluctuating input levels in the front left (L) and front right (R)
channels for the selected input. Meters are also present for center
(C), surround left (SL), surround right (SR), and sub (LFE) when the
input is set up for 5.1-analog. Like the STATUS menu level meters,
3-11
Setup
JBL
ANLG IN LVL menu level meters indicate input levels for both analog
and digital audio sources. However, ANLG IN LVL menu input level
adjustments only affect 2-channel (or 5.1-channel sources when the
MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF)
analog audio sources.
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when
the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.
Green indicates low levels; yellow indicates normal levels; and red
indicates the onset of overload. Occasional flashes from yellow into
red are normal peak indicators. Level meters appear in white when
the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-screen
background (see page 3-52).
VIDEO IN
SETUP
COMPOSITE-1 TO 2, S-VIDEO-1 TO 3, NONE
INPUTS
DVD1
VIDEO IN
Note:
•
Composite video output connectors are available when a
composite or S-video source is present.
•
S-video output connectors are available when an S-video source is
present.
COMPONENT IN
SETUP
INPUTS
COMPONENT 1 to 4, VIDEO, NONE
DVD1
COMPONENT IN
Opens the COMPONENT IN menu, to assign a component video
input connector to the selected input.
The VIDEO parameter assigns the video selected by the VIDEO IN
parameter (composite or S-video) to be converted and output as
component video.
Opens the VIDEO IN menu, to assign a composite or S-video input
connector to the selected input.
3-12
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DVD1
1
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DVD1 VIDEO IN
COMPOSITE-1
COMPOSITE-2
S-VIDEO-1
S-VIDEO-2
S-VIDEO-3
NONE
DVD1 COMPONENT IN
COMPONENT-1
COMPONENT-2
COMPONENT-3
COMPONENT-4
VIDEO
NONE
Setup
SDP-40HD
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES
Preferred listening modes can be preselected so that when a
particular type of input source is played, the preselected listening
mode is activated.
The SDP-40HD allows four preferred listening modes for each Main
Zone input: one listening mode each for 2-channel, Dolby Digital,
DTS(-ES), and 5.1-multichannel sources. The table below indicates
the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to select
preferred listening modes.
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters
2-CH
D
Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources
Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources
Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources
5.1mc Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1-channel sources
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
DVD1
HDMI IN
1
DIGITAL IN
HDMI
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1mc 5.1mc FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
RECORD IN
DIGITAL
RECORD ADVANCED
DVD1
MODE
FILM
MUSIC
2-CHAN
USE LAST
DVD1 5.1mc MODE
5.1mc FILM
5.1mc MUSIC
5.1mc
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
USE LAST
DVD1 2-CH MODE
DVD1
5.1
5.1
5.1
D MODE
FILM
TV
MUSIC
DIGITAL
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
USE LAST
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
USE LAST
3-13
Setup
JBL
When a preferred listening mode is selected, that listening mode is
automatically activated whenever a new input is selected or an
appropriate input source is present. For example, the following can
occur when a preferred listening mode is activated (also refer to the
corresponding menus on page 3-13):
If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is played, the
L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a Dolby Digital source is
played, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a DTS(-ES)
source is played, the DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode is activated.
Dynamic Listening Modes
Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions.
For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available when
the SDP-40HD is configured for seven main output channels and
source material with specific encoding is played. All Dynamic
Listening Modes are available through the remote control or front
panel Mode button. The dynamic listening modes are listed in the
table below.
Modes That Do Not Appear in the Input Setup Menu
The SDP-40HD features the ability to assign preferred listening modes
for each input and incoming audio format. However, not all listening
modes will appear in the Input Setup Menu. Listening modes that do
not appear in the Input Setup menu as preferred listening modes
under any circumstances are listed in the table at the bottom of the
page.
Dynamic modes
2-Channel
Dolby Digital
DTS
5.1mc
Dolby PLIIx + THX
Dolby PLIIx MOV
Dolby PLIIx MUS
DTS Neo:6 + THX
DTS Neo:6 CIN
DTS Neo:6 MUSIC
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital EX
THX or THX UL2Cin or THX SurEX
THX MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DTS THX or DTS THX UL2Cin or DTS(-ES) THX
DTS or DTS(-ES) MATRIX or DTS(-ES) DISCR
DTS THX MUSIC
DTS L7 FILM or DTS(-ES) L7 FILM
DTS L7 MUSIC or DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC
DTS 2-CHAN or DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN
5.1mc THX MUSIC
Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu
3-14
2-Channel
Dolby Digital
DTS
5.1mc
Dolby PLIIx + THX
Dolby PLIIx MOV
Dolby PLIIx MUS
DTS Neo:6 + THX
DTS Neo:6 CIN
THX MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DTS THX MUSIC
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
5.1mc THX MUSIC
Setup
SDP-40HD
Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu
DTS Neo:6 MUSIC
3-15
Setup
JBL
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)
The Use Last Parameter
When the SDP-40HD is set to use a preferred listening mode for a
selected input, selecting another mode from the Mode scroll list
replaces the preferred selection. However, this newly selected mode
will be lost when switching between inputs.
The USE LAST parameter was designed to allow the SDP-40HD
software to “remember” the last used listening mode for a given
input source. Once selected, that mode will always be active on the
corresponding input until another listening mode is selected as
demonstrated in the following example:
1. Select Main Menu SETUP INPUTS DVD1
LAST.
USE
always be accessed using the MODE + or MODE - buttons whether
or not a preferred mode is set. When a preferred listening mode is set
and a dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the
input setup menu) is active, the selected dynamic mode is lost when
switching between inputs.
When USE LAST is selected as the preferred listening mode, and a
dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the input
setup menu) is active, the selected listening mode is retained when
switching between inputs, even when the SDP-40HD is set to
standby as in the following example:
1. Select Main Menu SETUP INPUTS DVD1
LAST.
2. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Press the DVD-1 button.
3. Press the DVD-1 button.
4. Play a DTS input source.
4. Play a 2-channel input source.
5. Press the MODE + button until you reach DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN.
5. Press the MODE + button until you reach
PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode.
6. Press the TV button
The SDP-40HD switches to the TV input and the on-screen
display identifies the preferred listening mode.
7. Press the DVD-1 button.
The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode
for the DVD1 input is still DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN. As the DTS(-ES)
2-CHAN mode is a preferred listening mode, it can also be set in
the SETUP menu.
When seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu, and
the appropriate source material is played, the dynamic listening
mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) can
3-16
2-CH
USE
PLIIx MOV.
6. Press the TV button
The SDP-40HD switches to the TV input and the on-screen
display identifies the preferred listening mode.
7. Press the DVD-1 button.
The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode
for the DVD1 input is still
PLIIx MOV. This is the only method of
setting up a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the
input setup menu) to behave like a preferred listening mode.
Setup
SDP-40HD
Note:
When a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup
menu) is set as in the above example, the setting is retained even when
the SDP-40HD is set to standby.
2-CH
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
2-CH
activates the preferred listening mode whenever a new input is
selected or a new Dolby Digital source is present.
When the
D parameter is set to USE LAST:
•
The SDP-40HD uses the listening mode that was activated the
last time a Dolby Digital source was present.
•
If the THX MUSIC listening mode was activated the last time a
Dolby Digital source was present, then the THX MUSIC
listening mode is used. Since THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening
mode, it cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for
Dolby Digital sources.
Opens the 2-CH MODE menu, to select a preferred listening mode
for 2-channel input sources. The SDP-40HD activates the preferred
listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new
2-channel source is present.
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:
•
The SDP-40HD uses the listening mode that was activated the
last time a 2-channel source was present.
•
The remote control 2 CH button toggles between the
2-CHANNEL listening mode and the previous listening mode,
and ignores the USE LAST setting. Instead, it uses the listening
mode (for example, L7 FILM) that was activated before the
2-CHANNEL listening mode.
•
The SDP-40HD will automatically activate a DTS NEO:6
listening mode if a DTS NEO:6 listening mode was activated the
last time a 2-channel source was present, and 44.1kHz or 48kHz
PCM digital source is present. Since the DTS NEO:6 listening
modes are dynamic, they cannot be selected as the preferred
listening mode for 2-channel sources.
D
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
Opens the DTS(-ES) MODE menu, to select a preferred listening
mode for DTS(-ES) input sources. The SDP-40HD activates the
preferred listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new
DTS(-ES) source is present.
When the DTS(-ES) parameter is set to USE LAST:
•
The SDP-40HD uses the listening mode that was activated the
last time a DTS(-ES) source was present.
•
The DTS(-ES) THX MUSIC listening mode is used if this listening
mode was activated the last time a DTS(-ES) source was
present. Since DTS(-ES) THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening
mode, it cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for
DTS(-ES) sources.
D
Opens the DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, to select a preferred
listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources. The SDP-40HD
3-17
Setup
JBL
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)
5.1mc
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
5.1mc
Opens the 5.1mc MODE menu, to select a preferred listening mode
for 5.1-channel input sources. The SDP-40HD activates the
preferred listening mode whenever a new input is selected or a new
5.1-channel source is present.
When the 5.1mc parameter is set to USE LAST:
•
The SDP-40HD uses the listening mode that was activated the
last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.
•
The 5.1mc THX MUSIC listening mode is used if this listening
mode was activated the last time a 5.1-channel source was
present. Since 5.1mc THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode,
it cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for
5.1-channel analog sources.
3-18
Setup
SDP-40HD
CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 MAIN ADV
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
DVD1
HDMI IN
1
DIGITAL IN
HDMI
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1mc 5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
HDMI OSD
ON
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
The SDP-40HD allows the assignment of one digital and one analog
audio input connector for each input. The table below indicates the
INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to control the
interaction of these connectors, as well as other advanced Main
Zone, Zone 2, and Record Zone input settings.
Parameter
Possible Settings
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
RECORD IN
RECORD ADVANCED
See MAIN ADVANCED, this page
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX
Refer to page 3-25
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
AUTO
OFF
ON
OFF
NORMAL
FAST
DIGITAL
ANLG
DMIX
MAIN ADVANCED
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
The MAIN ADV menu controls the interaction of the digital and
analog audio input connectors assigned to the current Main Zone
input, and other advanced Main Zone input settings.
The parameter settings on the right side of the MAIN ADV menu are
adjustable. The MAIN ADV menu shown in the Appendix indicates
factory-default parameter settings for each input.
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT SELECT
ANALOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT
DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO
ON, OFF
AUTO, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
NORMAL, FAST
3-19
Setup
JBL
CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS
INPUT SELECT
SETUP
INPUTS
(continued)
DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
SETUP
INPUT SELECT
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input
connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input. The table on
the next page describes INPUT SELECT parameter settings.
Note:
When the Shift command bank is activated, the 7/5 button adjusts the
INPUT SELECT parameter by cycling through the DIGITAL, ANALOG,
and AUTO settings.
ANALOG BYPASS
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED
ANALOG BYPASS
Forces analog sources to bypass A/D conversion and internal
processing. When ON, analog input signals pass directly to the
Main Zone audio output connectors.
•
When a 2-channel analog source is present, analog input signals
pass directly to the Front L/R output connectors.
•
When a 5.1-channel analog source is present, analog input
signals pass to the Main Zone audio output connectors as
indicated in the tables on page 1-8 and page 3-47.
•
When OFF, the SDP-40HD passes analog input signals through
A/D conversion and internal processing before passing them to
the Main Zone audio output connectors. This allows analog
sources to use bass management, speaker crossovers, speaker
distance calibration, and tone controls.
Note:
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the 2CH button
toggles ANALOG BYPASS between ON and OFF.
3-20
S-VIDEO 16:9
INPUTS
AUTO, OFF
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
S-VIDEO 16:9
Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some
video sources. When set to AUTO, the SDP-40HD allows
anamorphic video input signals to pass through the S-video
switcher, enabling compatible display devices to automatically
switch between anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes.
When OFF, the SDP-40HD prevents anamorphic video input signals
from passing through the S-video switcher, preventing compatible
display devices from automatically switching between anamorphic
and non-anamorphic display modes.
Setup
SDP-40HD
INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGS
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
The SDP-40HD sends the digital audio from
the assigned input to the Main Zone audio
output connectors. The assigned analog
audio input connector is ignored.
The SDP-40HD sends the analog audio from
the assigned input to the Main Zone audio
output connectors. The assigned digital audio
input connector is ignored.
The SDP-40HD toggles between sending digital or
analog audio input to the Main Zone audio output
connectors based on the input source that is
present.
The digital audio input connectors are
compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2,
and 96kHz), Dolby Digital, and DTS(-ES)
s o u rc e s . T h e d i g i t a l a u d i o i n p u t
connectors are not compatible with
MPEG or MP3 sources.
Note the following:
Example:
•
The SDP-40HD automatically sets the
INPUT SELECT parameter to ANALOG
when no digital audio input connector is
assigned.
•
•
The
INPUT
SETUP
ANALOG
IN
parameter can assign an analog audio
input connector for the selected input.
The SDP-40HD selects the assigned digital
audio input when a compatible digital
source is present. The SDP-40HD does not
select the assigned analog audio input
w h e n a c o m p a t i b l e d i g it a l s o u rc e i s
present.
•
The SDP-40HD selects the assigned analog
audio input connector when no compatible
digital source is present.
•
The SDP-40HD selects the assigned analog
audio input connector when an analog
source, such as an SACD, is present.
Note the following:
•
•
The SDP-40HD automatically sets
the INPUT SELECT parameter to
DIGITAL when no analog audio
input connector is assigned.
The INPUT SETUP
DIGITAL IN
parameter can assign a digital audio
input connector for the selected
input.
Note the following:
•
The SDP-40HD automatically sets the MAIN
ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT parameter to
AUTO when both digital and analog audio
input connectors are assigned.
•
Use the AUTO setting for components, such as
DVD/SACD players, that generate both digital
and analog output signals.
3-21
Setup
JBL
CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS
(continued)
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
Controls the on-screen display aspect ratio when the display device
is connected to a Main Zone S-video output connector. Aspect ratio
refers to the shape of the picture or the display device screen. A 4:3
aspect ratio is almost square. A 16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to
as widescreen, is almost twice as wide as it is high. When ON, the
on-screen display appears in a 4:3 aspect ratio regardless of the
incoming video input signal. When OFF, the on-screen display
appears in the same aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal.
The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched across the
display device screen when all of the following conditions are met:
•
•
•
The S-VIDEO OSD (4:3) parameter is OFF.
An anamorphic video input signal is present.
A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected to an S-video
output connector.
COMPONENT OSD
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED
connector shows the on-screen display only when composite or
S-video is converted and output through the component video
connectors (INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN parameter is set to
COMPOSITE VIDEO or S-VIDEO and COMPONENT IN is set to
VIDEO).
HDMI OSD
SETUP
INPUTS
HDMI-1 TO HDMI-6, NONE
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
HDMI OSD
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to the HDMI output connector. When ON, the
display device shows the on-screen display as a video signal
overlayed on the incoming HDMI video. If the SETUP > DISPLAYS >
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY > BACKGROUND parameter is set to ON, or
the INPUT SETUP menu DHMI IN parameter is set to NONE, the
OSD will display on a full blue screen background.
If the current input also has an active incoming S-video or
composite video signal, the OSD on both the HDMI and Svideo/composite main zone outputs will display as white characters
on the screen. Otherwise the HDMI OSD will display in full color.
COMPONENT OSD
FORMAT DETECT
NORMAL, FAST
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to the component video output connector.
When ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as a 480i
video signal on a full blue screen background. To minimize viewing
distractions, the two-line status does not appear in the on-screen
display. When OFF, the display device does not show the on-screen
display, including the two-line status.
Provides a means of preventing audible digital noise from occurring
during digital audio signal changes. Digital sources typically output
a short period of silence when switching between sources. The
FORMAT DETECT parameter controls how the SDP-40HD reacts
when it detects silence in the digital audio stream.
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is
OFF, the display device using the component video output
When set to NORMAL, the SDP-40HD will not mute when silence is
detected. This setting is appropriate for most sources.
3-22
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
FORMAT DETECT
Setup
SDP-40HD
When set to FAST, the SDP-40HD will mute when a period of
continuous digital silence is detected. Once valid audio is received,
the SDP-40HD will configure its processing and deactivate mute.
This prevents audible digital noise from occurring during digital
audio signal changes. For example, the SDP-40HD will briefly mute
when FORMAT DETECT is set to FAST and the digital audio stream
changes from PCM to DTS.
Note
The Format Detection parameter does not apply to the Dolby PLIIx
family of listening modes. Use the Logic 7 family of listening modes as
an alternative when using Format Detection.
ZONE2 IN & RECORD IN
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX
ZONE2 IN OR RECORD IN
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input
connectors assigned to the current Zone 2 and Record Zone inputs.
The table on the next page describes ZONE2 and RECORD IN
parameter settings.
CAUTION!
When the ZONE2 or RECORD IN parameter is set to DIGITAL or
ANLG, the SDP-40HD recognizes some DTS encoded sources as
audio signals (not data signals) and outputs loud digital noise
from the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors.
3-23
Setup
JBL
ZONE2 & RECORD IN PARAMETER SETTINGS
DIGITAL
ANLG (Analog)
DMIX (Downmix)
The SDP-40HD passes digital audio
from the assigned input to the Zone 2
or Record Zone audio output
connectors. The assigned analog audio
input is ignored. Zones can be independently monitored.
The SDP-40HD passes analog audio
from the assigned input to the Zone 2
or Record Zone audio output
connectors. The assigned digital audio
input is ignored. Zones can be independently monitored.
Note the following:
• Zone 2 and the Record Zone are
muted if the DIGITAL IN parameter is
set to HDMI AUDIO. In this case,
DMIX must be selected.
• The SDP-40HD passes digital sources
to all Zone 2 or Record Zone audio
output connectors.
• The SDP-40HD passes digital input
signals directly to the Record Zone
digital audio output connectors. The
SDP-40HD sends digital input signals
through D/A conversion before
passing them to the Zone 2 or Record
Zone analog a udio output
connectors.
• When no analog audio input is
assigned, ZONE2 IN and RECORD
IN are set to DIGITAL.
• The INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL
IN parameter can be used to assign
a digital audio input connector for
the selected input.
Note the following:
• The SDP-40HD passes analog
sources to all Zone 2 or Record
Zone audio output connectors.
• The SDP-40HD passes analog input
signals directly to the Zone 2 or
Record Zone analog audio output
connectors. The SDP-40HD sends
analog input signals through A/D
conversion before passing them to
the Record Zone digital audio
output connectors.
• When no digital audio input is
assigned, ZONE2 IN and
RECORD IN are set to ANALOG.
• The
INPUT
SETUP
menu
ANALOG IN parameter can be
used to assign an analog audio
input connector for the selected
input.
The SDP-40HD passes a downmixed version of Main Zone audio to
the Zone 2 or Record Zone audio output connectors. Zones cannot be
independently monitored. Downmixing is possible when all of the
following conditions are met:
• The same input is selected in both Main Zone and Zone 2 or in
both Main Zone and Record Zone. Otherwise, the Zone 2 or
Record Zone audio output connectors will mute.
• The 5.1mc BYPASS listening mode is not activated.
3-24
Note the following:
• If the downmixed audio is coming from the HDMI input, and the
content is HDCP-encoded, the sample rate is limited to no more
than 48kHz.
• If the audio from a copy-protected DVD-Audio disc is input
through HDMI, then no digital audio output is available.
• A downmix of all channels is sent to Zone 2.
• Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 and
Record Zone audio output connectors. For example, when the
MONO listening mode is activated, the Zone 2 and Record Zone
audio output connectors will generate mono output signals.
• Set the ZONE2 IN and RECORD IN parameters to DMIX when
using a playback device (DVD player) that does not have built-in
Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) decoding, and the recording device is a
VCR or Personal Video Recorder (PVR).
• The SDP-40HD automatically downmixes multi-channel sources
(except LOGIC 7 FILM and MUSIC sources) to stereo output
signals for listening and recording. Also, 5.1-channel analog
sourc es can be dow nmix ed w hen the MAIN
ADVANCED
ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to OFF. Upon
playback, these downmixes are compatible with matrix decoders,
but sound best through a Logic 7 listening mode.
Setup
SDP-40HD
CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS
(continued)
RECORD ADVANCED
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ANLG IN LVL
RECORD ADVANCED
SETUP
Opens the RECORD ADV menu, which configures advanced Record
Zone input settings.
The parameters on the left side of the RECORD ADV menu are
identical regardless of the selected input. The parameter settings on
the right side are adjustable. The RECORD ADV menu shown in the
Appendix indicates factory-default parameter settings.
Possible Settings
ANLG IN LVL
-18 to +12dB
DIGITAL BYPASS
ON, OFF
DIG OUT RATE
INPUT, 96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz
RECORD
BLOCKED, ENABLED
DVD1
RECORD ADVANCED
ANLG IN LVL
Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sent to
the Record Zone digital audio output connectors. Adjustments are
applied to the input signals before passing them to the Record Zone
digital audio output connectors. This parameter can be adjusted when an
input source is present to prevent the internal A/D converter from
overloading.
DIGITAL BYPASS
SETUP
Parameter
INPUTS
-18 to +12dB
INPUTS
ON, OFF
DVD1
RECORD ADVANCED
DIGITAL BYPASS
Allows direct digital recording (digital sources bypass sample rate
conversion). When ON, digital input signals pass directly to the
Record Zone digital audio output connectors, preserving the
original input signal sample rate. When OFF, the sample rate of the
digital signals is converted, then passed to the Record Zone digital
audio output connectors. The sample rate of the output signal then
matches the sample rate of the recording device. The DIG OUT
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 RECORD ADV
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
DVD1
HDMI IN
1
DIGITAL IN
HDMI
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1mc 5.1mc FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
RECORD IN
DIGITAL
RECORD ADVANCED
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
DIGITAL BYPASS
OFF
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
RECORD
ENABLED
-18 to +12dB
ON
OFF
INPUT
96kHz
88.2 kHz
48kHz
44.1kHz
BLOCKED
ENABLED
3-25
Setup
JBL
RATE parameter settings have no effect when the DIGITAL BYPASS
parameter is set to ON.
RECORD
If the downmixed audio is coming from the HDMI input, and the
content is HDCP-encoded, the sample rate is limited to no more
than 48kHz.
Prevents recording device feedback loops. When BLOCKED is
selected, the SDP-40HD blocks the Record Zone audio output
connectors to prevent feedback loops. However, video input signals
are still passed to the Record Zone video output connectors. When
ENABLED is selected, audio and video input signals are passed to
the Record Zone audio and video output connectors.
If the audio from a copy-protected DVD-Audio disc is input through
HDMI, then no digital audio output is available.
DIG OUT RATE
SETUP
INPUTS
INPUT, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
DVD1
RECORD ADVANCED
DIG OUT RATE
Controls the sample rate of digital and analog input signals sent to
the Record Zone digital audio output connectors. When INPUT is
selected, the sample rate of input signals is not converted.
Therefore, the original sample rate is maintained from the input
connectors through to the Record Zone digital audio output
connectors.
When a value is selected, the input signals pass through the
selected value of sample rate conversion, then pass to the Record
Zone digital audio output connectors. Set the DIG OUT RATE
parameter to the appropriate value when using a recording format
that operates on a single sample rate, such as CD-R format
(44.1kHz).
If the downmixed audio is coming from the HDMI input, and the
content is HDCP-encoded, the sample rate is limited to no more
than 48kHz.
3-26
SETUP
INPUTS
BLOCKED, ENABLED
DVD1
RECORD ADVANCED
RECORD
Setup
SDP-40HD
SPEAKER SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKERS
Selecting the SETUP menu SPEAKERS option opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which configures the Main Zone audio output connectors for the
desired speaker setup. The Main Zone includes 10 unbalanced audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, Subwoofer L/R, Side L/R,
and Rear L/R. Two additional audio output connectors labeled Aux L/R are provided for future expansion.
.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
CUSTOM
SPEAKER
SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKER
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM
SETUP
40 Hz
CUSTOM
SETUP
SYNTHESIS
SETUP
60 Hz
SYNTHESIS
7CH7 CH
SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS
CALIBRATION
60 Hz
LEVELS
CALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
N/A
C
APART
SPEA
LEVEL
80Hz
M
SUB
0.0Hz
L
0.0Hz
SL
0.0Hz
RL
0.0Hz
3-27
Setup
JBL
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
INPUTS
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL
PANEL CONFIG
REAR
DISPLAYS
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
CONTROLS
VOLUME
TRIGGER
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
OPTIONS
LOCK
CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM
SPEAKERSETUP
SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
40 Hz
SYNTHESIS 7 CH SETUP
60 Hz
60 Hz
SPEAKER DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
C
APART
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
L
80Hz
SL
RL
80 Hz
FRONT L/R
80 Hz
CENTER
80 Hz
SIDE L/R
80 Hz
REAR L/R
SUB L/R
MONO
80 Hz
SUB XOVER
LFE
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART
80Hz
80Hz
CUSTOM SETUPS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens
the CUSTOM SETUP menu, which assigns independent crossover
points for each Main Zone audio output connector. Crossover
points can be selected in 10Hz increments within a 30 to 120Hz
range. The graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency
response of each crossover point.
To configure a custom speaker setup:
•
Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of
the associated speakers. For example, set the FRONT L/R
parameter to the crossover point closest to the low frequency
rating of the front speakers.
•
Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowest
crossover point of any of the other speakers. For example, if
CUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above, set
the SUB XOVER parameter to 80Hz – the lowest crossover point
of the other speakers.
In a custom setup, low frequencies are generally redirected from
speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the
lowest crossover points. Signals lower than the lowest crossover
point are redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point
is FULL, low frequency signals, excluding LFE information, are not
redirected to the subwoofer.
Low frequencies between the Subwoofer L/R and any or all of the
other speaker channels can be duplicated. To do this, select the
FULL + SUB crossover setting for the front, center, side or rear
speakers. Making this selection can result in excessive bass.
3-28
Setup
SDP-40HD
SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS
(continued)
High-pass Filter
High-pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the curves
represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz. The graph above does not show the THX
80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.
Low-pass Filter
Low-pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the
curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz.
3-29
Setup
JBL
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM
SPEAKER
SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKER
SETUP
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
L
80Hz
SL
80Hz
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CUSTOM
CUSTOMSETUP
SETUP 40 Hz
SYNTHESIS
CH SETUP
60 Hz
SYNTHESIS7 7CH
SETUP
60 Hz
SPEAKER
SPEAKERDISTANCES
DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
C
APART
FRONT L/R
80Hz
CENTER
80Hz
SIDE L/R
80Hz
REAR L/R
80Hz
SUB L/R
MONO
SUB XOVER THX 80Hz
LFE
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART
!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE
BUTTON WILL
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A
SYNTHESIS
7CH SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION
RL
80Hz
SYNTHESIS 7CH SPEAKER SETUPS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7 CH SETUP
Selecting CUSTOM SETUP SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP opens the
SYNTHESIS 7CH SPEAKER SETUP screen, which indicates that
pressing the arrow button will automatically configure the Main
Zone audio output connectors for a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup.
You should use THX certified speakers in a SYNTHESIS speaker
setup.
When the SYNTHESIS 7CH SPEAKER SETUP screen opens:
•
Press the arrow button to configure the Main Zone audio
output connectors for a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup. The
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu will open on the on-screen
display.
3-30
•
Press the arrow button to close the message without
configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a
SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup.
•
When a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is selected, the
SDP-40HD applies a THX 80Hz crossover point with a
12dB-per-octave filter to the Front L/R, Center, Side L/R, and
Rear L/R output connectors. The SDP-40HD applies a THX
80Hz crossover point with a 24dB-per-octave filter to the
Subwoofer L/R output connectors.
Note:
•
A SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is not required to activate THX
listening modes.
•
In the SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu, only the REAR L/R, THX
ULTRA2 SUB, BGC, and ASA parameters can be changed.
Setup
SDP-40HD
SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS
(continued)
SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
or
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for
configuring all possible settings for speaker setup parameters in the
CUSTOM SETUP and SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menus.
one menu, the corresponding parameter setting is automatically
adjusted on the other menu. For example, when a SYNTHESIS 7CH
speaker setup is selected, the speaker setup parameters on the
CUSTOM SETUP menu are set to THX 80Hz.
Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of
the selected speaker setup. When a parameter setting is adjusted on
CUSTOM SETUP Menu
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Setting
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP Menu
Default Setting
Possible Settings
FRONT L/R*
80Hz
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
CENTER*
80Hz
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
80Hz
80Hz
SIDE L/R*
80Hz
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
80Hz
80Hz
REAR L/R
80Hz
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
80Hz
80Hz, NONE
SUB L/R*
MONO
MONO, STEREO, NONE
MONO
MONO
SUB XOVER*
80Hz
FULL, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
LFE*
OFF
ON, OFF
ON
ON
THX ULTRA2 SUB
OFF
ON, OFF
OFF
ON, OFF
BGC
N/A†
ON, OFF
N/A†
ON, OFF
ASA
APART
APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER
APART
APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER
* These parameters cannot be adjusted on the SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP menu.
† When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, the BGC parameter is not available (N/A).
3-31
Setup
JBL
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM
SPEAKERSETUP
SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
40 Hz
SYNTHESIS 7 CH SETUP
60 Hz
60 Hz
SPEAKER DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
C
APART
80Hz
FRONT L/R
80Hz
CENTER
80Hz
SIDE L/R
80Hz
REAR L/R
MONO
SUB L/R
80Hz
SUB XOVER
OFF
LFE
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
RL
80Hz
S U B W O O F E RS L / R
R E A R L / R S PE A K E R S
SIDE L/R SPEAKERS
CENTER SPEAKER
F R O NT L / R S P E A K E R S
FULL
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
MONO
STEREO
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
SPEAKERS
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz
CUSTOM SETUP
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the front speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low
frequency rating of the front speakers.
•
Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the front
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB L/R
outputs. (The set crossover point of the SUB XOVER parameter
determines the upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the
FULL + SUB option can result in excessive bass.
FRONT L/R
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled FRONT L/R when a custom speaker setup is
selected. Opens the FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a
crossover point for the FRONT L/R output connectors.
3-32
SL
80Hz
SUB XOVER
FRONT L/R
SETUP
L
80Hz
Setup
SDP-40HD
SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS
FRONT L/R
SETUP
(continued)
SIDE L/R
(continued)
SPEAKERS
FRONT L/R
SYNTHESIS 7CH
When a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is selected, an 80Hz
crossover point is applied to the FRONT L/R output connectors, and
the FRONT L/R parameter cannot be adjusted.
CENTER
SETUP
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the center speaker.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low
frequency rating of the center speaker.
•
Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the center
speaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB L/R outputs.
(The set crossover point of the SUB XOVER parameter
determines the upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the
FULL + SUB option can result in excessive bass.
•
Select NONE when the speaker setup does not include a center
speaker. The SDP-40HD then redirects center channel signals to the
Front L/R output connectors – unless the 5.1mc BYPASS listening
mode is activated. In this case, configure the speaker setup with the
associated DVD-A/SACD player to redirect center channel signals.
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH
CENTER
When a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is selected, an 80Hz
crossover point is applied to the Center output connector, and the
CENTER parameter cannot be adjusted.
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SIDE L/R
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled SIDE L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens
the SIDE L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the SIDE
L/R output connectors.
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the side speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low
frequency rating of the side speakers.
•
Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the side
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB L/R
outputs. (The set crossover point of the SUB XOVER parameter
determines the upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the
FULL + SUB option can result in excessive bass.
•
Select NONE when the speaker setup does not include side
speakers. The SDP-40HD will redirect side channel signals to
the Rear L/R output connectors. If the REAR L/R parameter is
also set to NONE, the SDP-40HD will redirect surround channel
signals to the Front L/R output connectors.
CENTER
Opens the CENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for
the CENTER output connector.
SETUP
SETUP
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
Note:
When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital
SurroundEX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, DTS(-ES) decoding, the
ASA parameter, and PLIIx modes are not available.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH
When a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is selected, an 80Hz
crossover point is applied to the SIDE L/R output connectors, and
the SIDE L/R parameter cannot be adjusted.
3-33
Setup
JBL
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM
SPEAKER
SETUP
SPEAKERSETUP
SETUP
CUSTOM
CUSTOM SETUP
SETUP 40 Hz
SYNTHESIS 7 CH SETUP
60 Hz
60 Hz
SPEAKER
SPEAKER DISTANCES
DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
C
APART
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
L
80Hz
SL
80Hz
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE
BUTTON WILL
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A
SYNTHESIS 7CH
SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION
RL
SYNTHESIS 7 CH SETUP
FRONT L/R
80Hz
CENTER
80Hz
SIDE L/R
80Hz
REAR L/R
80Hz
SUB L/R
MONO
SUB XOVER
80Hz
LFE
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB
OFF
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART
80Hz
REAR SPEAKERS
80Hz
NONE
REAR L/R
SETUP
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30Hz to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low
frequency rating of the rear speakers.
•
Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the rear
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB L/R
outputs. (The set crossover point of the SUB XOVER parameter
determines the upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the
FULL + SUB option can result in excessive bass.
Select NONE when the speaker setup does not include rear speakers.
The SDP-40HD then redirects rear channel signals to the Side L/R
output connectors. If the SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE,
surround channel signals are sent to the Front L/R output connectors.
3-34
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH
REAR L/R
REAR L/R
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled REAR L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens
the REAR L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the
REAR L/R output connectors.
•
SETUP
When a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is selected, the REAR L/R
parameter opens the SYNTHESIS 7CH REAR SPEAKERS menu shown
above, to activate and deactivate the REAR L/R output connectors.
•
Select 80Hz to activate and configure the Rear L/R output
connectors for a 7.1-channel THX speaker setup.
•
Select NONE to deactivate the Rear L/R output connectors,
configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a
5.1-channel THX speaker setup.
Note:
When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround
EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, PLIIx modes, DTS(-ES) decoding, and
the ASA parameter are not available.
Setup
SDP-40HD
SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS
SUB L/R
SETUP
(continued)
MONO, STEREO, NONE
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SUB L/R
Configures the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled
SUBWOOFER L/R for a speaker setup that includes one, two, or no
subwoofer(s).
When a custom speaker setup is selected, the SUB L/R parameter
opens the SUBWOOFERS L/R menu, to select a configuration for the
SUBWOOFER L/R output connectors.
•
Select MONO if the speaker setup includes one subwoofer. The
SDP-40HD sends low frequency front, center, and surround
channel signals to the SUBWOOFER L/R output connectors.
•
Select STEREO if the speaker setup includes two subwoofers.
The SDP-40HD sends low frequency front left, center, and
surround left channel signals to the SUBWOOFER L output
connector and low frequency front right, center, and surround
right channel signals to the SUBWOOFER R output connector.
•
Select NONE if the speaker setup does not include a subwoofer.
The SDP-40HD redirects low frequency signals to the speakers
with the lowest crossover points – unless the 5.1mc BYPASS
listening mode is activated. In this instance, configure the
speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/SACD player to
redirect low frequency signals.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH
When a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is selected, the SUBWOOFER
L/R output connectors are configured for a speaker setup that
includes one subwoofer, and the SUB L/R parameter cannot be
adjusted.
SUB XOVER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz
CUSTOM SETUP
SUB XOVER
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled SUBWOOFER L/R when a custom speaker setup
is selected. Opens the SUB XOVER menu to select a crossover point
for the SUBWOOFER L/R output connectors.
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the subwoofer(s).
Otherwise, select the crossover point equal to the lowest crossover
point of the other speakers.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH
When a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is selected, an 80Hz
crossover point is applied to the SUBWOOFER L/R output
connectors, and the SUB L/R parameter cannot be adjusted.
LFE
ON, OFF
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
LFE
Activates and deactivates the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled LFE when a custom speaker setup is selected.
When a custom speaker setup is selected:
•
Select ON to activate the LFE output connector. LFE information is
sent to the LFE output connector.
•
Select OFF to deactivate the LFE output connector. LFE signals
are redirected to the SUBWOOFER L/R output connectors. If
the SUB L/R parameter is set to OFF, LFE signals are redirected
to the speakers with the lowest crossover point – unless the
3-35
Setup
JBL
5.1mc BYPASS listening mode is activated. In this instance,
configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/SACD
player to redirect low frequency signals.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SYNTHESIS 7CH
When a SYNTHESIS 7CH speaker setup is selected, the LFE information is
redirected to the SUBWOOFER L/R output connectors, and the LFE
parameter cannot be adjusted.
CUSTOM
SPEAKERSETUP
SETUP
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM SETUP
40 Hz
SYNTHESIS 7 CH SETUP
60 Hz
60 Hz
SPEAKER DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
C
APART
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
3-36
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE
BUTTON WILL
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A S
SPEAKER CONFIGURATION
FRONT L/R
80Hz
CENTER
80Hz
SIDE L/R
80Hz
REAR L/R
80Hz
SUB L/R
MONO
SUB XOVER
80Hz
LFE
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART
L
80Hz
SL
80Hz
RL
80Hz
ON
OFF
APART
CLOSE
TOGETHER
CUSTOM SETUP
FRONT L/R
80Hz
CENTER
80Hz
SIDE L/R
80Hz
REAR L/R
80Hz
SUB L/R
MONO
SUB XOVER
80Hz
LFE
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART
Setup
SDP-40HD
SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS
(continued)
THX ULTRA2 SUB
SETUP
or SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
ON, OFF
BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by the
proximity of the speakers to the listening room walls.
ULTRA2 SUB
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH
ULTRA2 SUB
Enables boundary gain compensation (BGC) for THX Ultra2certified subwoofers.
•
•
Select ON if the subwoofer using the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Subwoofer L/R is THX Ultra2-certified.
When ON is selected, the BGC parameter can be used to adjust
boundary gain compensation.
Select OFF if the subwoofer using the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Subwoofer L/R is not THX Ultra2-certified.
When OFF is selected, the BGC parameter is not available
(N/A).
BGC (BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION)
SETUP
or SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH
Note:
ON, OFF
BGC
BGC
ASA (ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY)
SETUP
or SETUP
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH
ON, OFF
ASA
ASA
ASA is a proprietary THX technology to process rear channel signals to
optimize the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening modes, including
THX UL2Cin, THX MUSIC, DTS THX UL2Cin, DTS THX MUSIC, 5.1mc THX
UL2Cin, and 5.1mc THX MUSIC. Applied to film sources, ASA processing
blends surround channel signals to optimize ambient and directional
surround sounds. Applied to music sources, ASA processing places surround
channel signals on a wide, stable rear soundstage.
ASA processing is available when one of the THX ULTRA2 listening
modes is activated and both side and rear speakers are present.
The ASA parameter can be changed in any mode, but the change
will have no effect unless the above conditions are met.
Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the THX ULTRA2 SUB
parameter is set to ON.
To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing, configure a
7.1-channel speaker setup so the rear speakers are placed close
together facing the center of the listening space.
•
Select ON to apply a high pass 55Hz filter to all Main Zone
audio output connectors and listening modes.
•
Select APART if the distance between the rear speakers is
greater than 4 feet (1.2m).
•
Select OFF, and no filtering is applied to the Main Zone audio
output connectors and listening modes.
•
Select CLOSE if the distance between the rear speakers is
greater than 1 foot (0.3m), but less than 4 feet (1.2m).
•
Select TOGETHER if the distance between the rear speakers is
less than 1 foot (0.3m).
3-37
Setup
You can use the remote control 7/5 button to toggle between 7and 5-channel playback. When you use the 7/5 button, the
SDP-40HD automatically:
•
•
•
Activates ASA processing during 7-channel playback.
Deactivates ASA processing during 5-channel playback.
Switches between the 5.1 THX ULTRA2 and THX, DTS THX ULTRA2
and DTS THX, or 5.1mc THX ULTRA2 and 5.1mc THX listening modes.
3-38
JBL
Setup
SDP-40HD
CALIBRATING SPEAKER DISTANCES & OUTPUT LEVELS
The SDP-40HD offers calibration of speaker distances and output levels. Calibration helps to ensure accurate output signal arrival time and level
at the primary listening position. However, it is not a substitute for proper speaker placement.
Before calibrating speaker distances and output levels:
SPEAKER CALIBRATION PARAMETERS
•
Set crossover points for the Main Zone audio output
connectors. Setting crossover points afterwards could
invalidate calibrated output levels (the CUSTOM or THX SETUP
menu can be used to set crossover points).
•
Eliminate extraneous noise in the listening space, including
conversation, air conditioners, and sounds that filter in through
open doors and windows.
The table on the next page indicates the speaker calibration
parameters that can be used to set speaker distances and output
levels for the speakers connected to the corresponding Main Zone
audio output connectors. These parameters are available on the
speaker distance and output level menus shown throughout this
section.
•
Move or remove people or objects blocking the path between the
microphones or SPL meter and the speakers.
SPEAKER DISTANCE PARAMETERS
+0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m
Reflect the distance between the primary listening position and the
speaker connected to the corresponding Main Zone audio output
connector.
OUTPUT LEVEL PARAMETERS
-18.0db to +12.0dB
Reflect the output level of signals sent to the speaker connected to
the corresponding Main Zone audio output connector.
3-39
Setup
JBL
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu, to manually calibrate speaker
distances and output levels. The table below indicates available manual calibration options.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM
SPEAKER
CUSTOMSETUP
SETUP
CUSTOM
SETUP
40 Hz
SET CROSSOVERS
SYNTHESIS
7 CH SETUP
60 Hz
CHECK MICROPHONES
60 Hz
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
AUTOMATIC
60 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
SET80Hz
CROSSOVERS
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
BEFORE CALIBRATING
C
APART
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
Manual Options
L
80Hz
SL
80Hz
RL
80Hz
Details
SPEAKER DISTANCES
Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances.
LEVELS CALIBRATION
Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector, allowing
for simultaneous output level adjustment.
DACS CALIBRATION
• Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.
• Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source.
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
• Provides amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled
Subwoofer L/R and LFE, and low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors.
• Protects speakers against input sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks.
3-40
Setup
SDP-40HD
CALIBRATION
(continued)
PERFORMING SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
SPEAKER DISTANCES
Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, to manually calibrate
speaker distances.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM
SPEAKERSETUP
SETUP
SPEAKER
SETUP
CUSTOM
SETUP
40 Hz
SET
CROSSOVERS
SYNTHESIS
7 CH SETUP
60 Hz
CHECK
MICROPHONES
60 Hz
SPEAKER
AUTOMATIC
SPEAKERDISTANCES
DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION
MANUAL
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
SET 80Hz
CROSSOVERS
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
BEFORE CALIBRATING
C
APART
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
L
80Hz
SL
80Hz
RL
80Hz
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
SETUP
MANUAL
SPEAKER
SETUP
0.0ft
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
LEVELS
CALIBRATION 0.0ft
0.0ft
FRONT RIGHT
0.0ft
SIDE RIGHT
0.0ft
REAR RIGHT
0.0ft
REAR LEFT
0.0ft
SIDE LEFT
0.0ft
MONO SUB
N/A
SUB RIGHT
N/A
LFE
FEET
UNITS
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m
METERS
FEET
SPEAKER DISTANCES
To manually calibrate speaker distances:
1. Follow the menu path shown above to select SPEAKER
DISTANCES. The SPEAKER DISTANCES menu shown above will
open on the on-screen display.
2. Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired
speaker distance parameter. Then, press the
arrow button
to select the highlighted speaker distance parameter.
3. To determine the appropriate speaker distance, measure the
distance between the primary listening position and the front
of the speaker.
For example, when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected,
measure the distance between the primary listening position
and the front of the front left speaker (connected to the Main
Zone audio output connector labeled Front L).
4. When the speaker distance has been measured, press the
or
arrow button to set the parameter to the closest available
value.
3-41
Setup
JBL
PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu to manually calibrate
output levels.
Note the following:
•
You should use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter to manually
calibrate output levels. An SPL meter is a device that measures
the relative loudness of the speakers to ensure accurate output
level calibration. SPL meters are available at Radio Shack.
•
Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening
position by placing the SPL meter at the approximate location
where the listener’s head will be during listening.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM
SPEAKER
SETUP
SPEAKERSETUP
SETUP
CUSTOM
SETUP
40 Hz
SET CROSSOVERS
SYNTHESIS 77CH
CH SETUP
SETUP
60 Hz
60 Hz
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
AUTOMATIC
60 Hz
LEVELS
MANUALCALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
SET80Hz
CROSSOVERS
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
BEFORE CALIBRATING
C
APART
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
L
80Hz
SL
80Hz
RL
80Hz
•
Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speaker
setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test. These
output levels can be adjusted during the external noise test,
but there is no need to do so.
LEVELS CALIBRATION
CUSTOM
SETUP
MANUAL
SPEAKER SETUP
INTERNAL
NOISE TEST
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
INTERNAL NOISE
C
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
M
SUB
DACS CALIBRATION
CUSTOM
SETUP
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
MONO SUB
SUB RIGHT
LFE
UNITS
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
N/A
N/A
-18.0 to +12.0dB
3-42
Setup
SDP-40HD
MANUAL CALIBRATION
(continued)
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page,
which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud
calibration noise signals.
When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens:
•
•
Press the
arrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST
menu shown on the previous page. When the SPEAKER LEVEL
ADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test automatically
begins.
Press the
button to stop the internal noise test.
During the internal noise test, the SDP-40HD sends calibration
noise signals to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER
LEVEL ADJUST menu. The cursor automatically scrolls through
output level parameters, highlighting each parameter as the
SDP-40HD sends the calibration noise signal to the corresponding
speaker. The calibration noise signal is sent to each speaker for
about 4 seconds.
Note:
When the internal noise test begins, the SDP-40HD automatically sets
the volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level
while the test is in progress to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).
To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test:
1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.
2. Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired
output level parameter. Then, quickly press the
button to
select this output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph
shown on the previous page will open on the on-screen display
and automatic scrolling will stop.
Note:
During the internal noise test, it is possible to select an output level
parameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to the
next parameter, causing the SDP-40HD to send the calibration
noise signal to both speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired
speaker.
3. When the horizontal bar graph opens, press the
or
button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL
meter reading from the primary listening position.
4. Press
to close the parameter. The internal noise test will
continue and automatic scrolling will resume.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 until all desired output levels have
been set.
INTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP
3-43
Setup
JBL
DACS CALIBRATION
SETUP
SPEAKERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
DACS CALIBRATION
Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu DACS CALIBRATION
option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on
page 3-42, which manually calibrates the output levels.
To manually calibrate output levels during the DACS calibration:
1. Set the SPL Meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.
2. Place the SPL Meter at the primary listening position.
DACS CALIBRATION requires an external noise source. In JBL
Synthesis systems, this source is the JBL Digital Acoustical
Calibration System (DACS®). However, an alternate source such as
an audio calibration disc can also be used. When the noise test is
conducted, the SDP-40HD activates a listening mode based on the
current Main Zone input source. Refer to the table below for more
information about external noise test listening mode activation.
When a listening mode is activated during the DACS CALIBRATION
test, all custom listening mode menu parameter settings are
ignored. The listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone
input source in its factory-default condition. When the DACS
CALIBRATION test is finished, the listening mode returns to its
custom condition.
Note:
When the DACS CALIBRATION test begins, the SDP-40HD
automatically sets the volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the
master volume level while the test is in progress to achieve THX
reference levels (75dB).
3. Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the output level
parameter you want. Then, press the
button to select this
output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph shown on
page 3-42 displays.
4. Begin playback of the external calibration source and press the
or
arrow button to select the output level that achieves
the SPL Meter reading specified in the external calibration
source instructions.
5. After selecting the output level, press the
close the horizontal bar graph.
arrow button to
6. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 until you have set all the output levels
you want.
INPUT SOURCE
LISTENING MODE
2-Channel
Dolby Digital
DTS(-ES)
5.1-Channel Analog
PLII MOVIE,
PLIIx MOVIE*
DIGITAL**
*
5.1mc STANDARD
* These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration. Dolby Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
will only load when side and rear speakers are present.
**These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker
setup, and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section
beginning on page 5-5 for more information.
3-44
Setup
SDP-40HD
MANUAL CALIBRATION
(continued)
SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
LEVELS CALIBRATION
The BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu to set amplitude limits on low frequency signals sent to the Main Zone
audio output Subwoofer L/R and LFE connectors. This menu also sets amplitude limits on low frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone
audio output connectors. The SDP-40HD is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low frequency signals from exceeding a designated
output level. This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources that produce low frequency signal peaks at much higher output levels than
2-channel sources. In home theaters, there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting to
reproduce low frequency signals.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
CUSTOM
SPEAKER
SETUP
SPEAKERSETUP
SETUP
CUSTOM
SETUP
SET CROSSOVERS 40 Hz
SYNTHESIS
7 CH SETUP
60 Hz
CHECK MICROPHONES
60 Hz
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
AUTOMATIC
60 Hz
LEVELS
CALIBRATION
MANUAL
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
SET80HzCROSSOVERS
N/A
BEFORECCALIBRATING
APART
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
CAL NOISE
L/R LIMITER
L/R LIMIT ADJ
LFE LIMITER
LFE LIMIT ADJ
ON
OFF
100dB
OFF
100dB
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
L
80Hz
SL
80Hz
75 to 120dB
RL
80Hz
ON
OFF
Note:
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Setting
CAL NOISE
ON
ON, OFF
L/R LIMITER
OFF
ON, OFF
L/R LIMIT ADJ
100dB
75 to 120dB
LFE LIMITER
OFF
ON, OFF
LFE LIMIT ADJ
100dB
75 to 120dB
You should configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings
whether output levels are automatically or manually calibrated.
3-45
Setup
JBL
CAL NOISE
SETUP
SPEAKERS
ON, OFF
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
CAL NOISE
Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or
external calibration source.
L/R LIMIT ADJ
SETUP
SPEAKERS
75 to 120dB
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
L/R LIMITER ADJ
Specifies the output level restriction applied to the Subwoofer L/R
output connectors, and to other Main Zone audio output
connectors to which low frequency signals are redirected.
To set the CAL NOISE parameter:
•
•
Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to set
bass peak limiters.
To set the L/R LIMIT ADJ parameter:
1. Select the L/R LIMIT ADJ parameter.
Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal.
Setting bass peak limiters with the calibration noise set to OFF
requires an external calibration source such as an audio
calibration disc.
L/R LIMITER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
The parameter initially sets to 75dB.
2. Press the
value.
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
L/R LIMITER
Limits low frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to
other speakers.
arrow button to change the parameter
The selected output level restriction is applied when the L/R
LIMITER parameter is set to ON.
ON, OFF
LEVELS CALIBRATION
or
LFE LIMITER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
ON, OFF
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
LFE LIMITER
To set the L/R LIMITER parameter:
Limits low frequency signals sent to the LFE subwoofer or redirected
to other speakers.
•
Select ON to restrict the output level of the low frequency
signals to the L/R LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.
To set the LFE LIMITER parameter:
•
Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level,
regardless of the L/R LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.
•
Select ON to restrict the output level of the low frequency
signals to the LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.
•
Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level,
regardless of the LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.
3-46
Setup
SDP-40HD
MANUAL CALIBRATION
(continued)
LFE LIMITER ADJ
SETUP
SPEAKERS
The parameter initially sets to 75dB.
75 to 120dB
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
LFE LIMITER ADJ
Specifies the output level restriction the SDP-40HD applies to the
LFE output connector.
2. Press the
value.
or
arrow button to change the parameter
The selected output level restriction is applied when the LFE
LIMITER parameter is set to ON.
To set the LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter:
1. Select the LFE LIMIT ADJ parameter.
REAR-PANEL CONFIGURATION
SETUP
8 STEREO INPUTS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
SETUP
Selecting the REAR PANEL CONFIG option displays the REAR PANEL
CONFIG menu shown below, to configure the analog audio input
connectors as eight (Left/Right) stereo connectors or as five
(Left/Right) stereo connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration
(Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R).
MAIN MENU
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
8 STEREO INPUTS
OR
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
REAR PANEL CONFIG
8 STEREO INPUTS
Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio
input connectors as eight stereo connectors.
When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected:
•
All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo
connectors.
•
The 5.1-channel connector is not available.
•
Input sources that were assigned to the 5.1-channel connector
are reassigned to the stereo connector labeled 6.
8 STEREO INPUTS
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
3-47
Setup
JBL
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG
SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG
Select the 5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG option to configure the analog audio
input connectors as five stereo and one 5.1-channel connectors.
When 5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG is selected:
•
The 5.1-channel connector should only be used with
5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.
•
The analog audio input connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are
configured as stereo connectors.
•
The analog audio input connectors labeled 6, 7, and 8 are
configured as 5.1-channel connectors.
•
Input sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors
labeled 6, 7, and 8 are reassigned to conform to the
5.1-channel configuration.
•
The 5.1-channel input is sent to the Main Zone audio output
connectors as indicated in the table below.
Input Connector(s)
Output Connector(s)
(L) & (R)
Front L/R
(C)
Center
(SUB)
Subwoofer L/R & LFE
(LS) & (RS) 5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG
Side L/R & Rear L/R
8 STEREO INPUTS REAR PANEL CONFIG SETUP
3-48
Setup
SDP-40HD
DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAYS
The DISPLAYS option displays the DISPLAY SETUP menu, to customize the on-screen and front-panel displays, restore audio/video
synchronization, and create and activate a custom unit name.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
OFF, 1 to 60ms
ON
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
Parameter
Default Setting
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
Refer to page 3-51
Possible Setting
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Refer to page 3-53
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
OFF, 1 to 60ms
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
ON, OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
Refer to page 3-50
A/V SYNC DELAY
SETUP
DISPLAYS
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON, OFF
CUSTOM
Activates the display of the custom unit name, which can be
created with the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu. When ON is selected,
the custom unit name scrolls across the on-screen and front panel
displays whenever the SDP-40HD is activated. When OFF is
selected, the custom unit name does not scroll across the on-screen
and front- panel displays when the SDP-40HD is activated.
OFF, 1 to 60ms
A/V SYNC DELAY
Restores audio/video synchronization when the SDP-40HD is
connected to components such as video processors that introduce
video signal delays. Select a value between 1 and 60ms to activate
an audio signal delay to compensate for the video signal delay.
3-49
Setup
JBL
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SDP-40HD
>
MAIN MENU
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SETUP
DISPLAYS
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown above,
which can be used to create a custom unit name. The factory
default unit name is SDP-40HD.
To create a custom unit name:
1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path shown above to
open the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu.
2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu drops down, locate the
current unit name on the second line. The cursor automatically
appears beneath the first character in the current unit name.
3. Use the following remote control commands to enter a new
unit name:
•
Press the
or
above the cursor.
•
Press the
button to advance to the next character space.
The cursor will automatically wrap to the first character
space when the last (twentieth) character space is passed.
3-50
arrow button to change the character
•
Pressing
menu.
will close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down
4. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press
until the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu closes. The new unit
name is saved automatically.
Setup
SDP-40HD
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY option opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, to customize the on-screen display.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
2 SECONDS
STATUS
TOP
POSITION
FORMAT
NTSC
BACKGROUND
ON
REMOTE STATE
ON
ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
TOP
CENTER
BOTTOM
SECAM
PAL
NTSC
ON
OFF
for two seconds whenever a new input source is present or a new
command is received. When ALWAYS OFF is selected, the on-screen
display remains deactivated at all times, and will not reactivate until the
STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
STATUS
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,
ALWAYS OFF
POSITION
TOP
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM
Note:
FORMAT
NTSC
SECAM, PAL, NTSC
BACKGROUND
ON
ON, OFF
REMOTE STATE
ON
ON, OFF
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to
ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display immediately deactivates. Press the
OSD button or use the front-panel display as a guide to reset the
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2
SECONDS.
STATUS
SETUP
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
STATUS
POSITION
SETUP
Controls the activation of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to a Main Zone video output connector. When
ALWAYS ON is selected, the on-screen display remains activated at all
times. When 2 SECONDS is selected, the on-screen display activates
DISPLAYS
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
POSITION
Controls the vertical alignment of the two-line status on the display
device screen. When TOP is selected, the two-line status appears
near the top of the display device screen. When CENTER is selected,
3-51
Setup
JBL
the two-line status appears centered on the display device screen.
When BOTTOM is selected, the two-line status appears near the
bottom of the display device screen.
the command bank from which the SDP-40HD last received a
command. The table below indicates the letter that represents each
command bank.
FORMAT
When ON is selected, the command bank indicator appears in the
top-right corner of the on-screen display whenever the SDP-40HD
receives a remote control command. When OFF is selected, the
command bank indicator does not appear on the on-screen display
when the SDP-40HD receives a remote control command.
SETUP
DISPLAYS
SECAM, PAL, NTSC
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FORMAT
Controls the compatibility between the composite and S-video
output connectors, the video switcher, and the display device.
Select the setting that is compatible with the source components
and the display device.
Note:
The FORMAT parameter has no effect on the component video output
connector.
BACKGROUND
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON, OFF
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
BACKGROUND
Determines the on-screen display background. When ON is
selected, the on-screen display appears over a solid blue or gray
background (depending on the display device). When OFF is
selected, the on-screen display appears over the video input signal.
Note:
When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the on-screen
display automatically deactivates when the display device is connected
to the Main Zone component video output connector.
REMOTE STATE
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON, OFF
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
REMOTE STATE
Activates the remote control command bank indicator, a letter that
appears in the top-right corner of the on-screen display to indicate
3-52
Letter Indicator
Command Bank
None*
Main Zone
Z
Zone 2
R
Record Zone
S
Shift
* No letter appears when the SDP-40HD receives a command from the Main Zone
command bank, even if the REMOTE STATE parameter is set to ON.
Setup
SDP-40HD
FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY
SETUP
DISPLAYS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, to customize the front panel display.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
STATUS
BRIGHTNESS
Default Setting Possible Settings
STATUS
ALWAYS ON
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,
ALWAYS OFF
BRIGHTNESS
75%
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%
SETUP
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF
DISPLAYS
ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
100%
75%
50%
25%
Note:
DISPLAY DISPLAYS SETUP
Parameter
STATUS
ALWAYS ON
75%
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
STATUS
Controls the activation of the front-panel display. When ALWAYS ON
is selected, the front panel display remains activated at all times.
When 2 SECONDS is selected, the front-panel display activates for
two seconds whenever a new input source is present or a new
command is received. When ALWAYS OFF is selected, the front panel
display remains deactivated at all times, and will not reactivate until
the STATUS parameter is reset to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.
If both the on-screen and front panel displays are inadvertently turned
off, pressing the DISPLAY button on the remote control always turns
the front panel display on.
BRIGHTNESS
SETUP
DISPLAYS
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS
Controls the illumination of front panel display characters. When a
setting is selected, front panel display characters automatically
adjust to the selected illumination percentage.
3-53
Setup
JBL
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, to configure the Main
Zone, Zone 2, and Record Zone volume levels.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
MAIN PWR ON
MUTE LEVEL
ZONE PWR ON
REC PWR ON
MAX VOLUME
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
+12dB
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB
-10dB
-20dB
-30dB
-40dB
FULL MUTE
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Setting
MAIN PWR ON
-30dB
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
MUTE LEVEL
FULL MUTE
-10dB, -20dB, -30dB, -40dB,
FULL MUTE
ZONE PWR ON
-30dB
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
REC PWR ON
-30dB
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
MAX VOLUME
+6dB
-80 to +6dB
MAIN PWR ON
VOLUME CONTROLS
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
MAIN PWR ON
Selects the volume level at which the Main Zone activates. When a
value is selected, the SDP-40HD automatically sets the Main Zone
3-54
MUTE LEVEL
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
-10dB, -20dB, -30dB, -40dB, FULL MUTE
MUTE LEVEL
Determines the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main
Zone when the Mute button is pressed. When a value is selected,
the Main Zone volume level is attenuated to the selected value
when the Mute button is pressed. When FULL MUTE is selected, the
Main Zone volume level is fully attenuated when the Mute button is
pressed.
ZONE PWR ON
VOLUME CONTROLS SETUP
SETUP
volume level to the selected value when the Main Zone is activated.
When LAST LVL is selected, the SDP-40HD sets the Main Zone
volume level to the last volume level that was selected in the Main
Zone during the previous operating session.
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
ZONE PWR ON
Sets the Zone 2 volume level for the output connector labeled Var
to the selected value when Zone 2 is activated. When a value is
selected, the Zone 2 volume level is automatically set to the
selected value when Zone 2 is activated. When LAST LVL is selected,
the SDP-40HD sets the Zone 2 volume level to the last volume level
that was selected in Zone 2 during the previous operating session.
Setup
SDP-40HD
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
(continued)
REC PWR ON
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
REC PWR ON
Sets the Record Zone volume level for the output connector labeled
Var to the selected value when the Record Zone is activated. When
LAST LVL is selected, the SDP-40HD sets the Record Zone volume
level to the last volume level that was selected in the Record Zone
during the previous operating session.
When the Record Zone Var audio output connector is connected to
a recording device, set the volume to +0dB to achieve appropriate
recording levels. Adjusting the Record Zone volume level will affect
the recording.
MAX VOLUME
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
-80 to +6dB
MAX VOLUME
Limits the volume to the MAX VOLUME parameter value if you
attempt to adjust the volume above that level.
3-55
Setup
JBL
TRIGGER SETUP
SETUP
TRIGGER 1 SETUP
TRIGGERS
SETUP
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
TRIGGER SETUP
TRIGGER 1
TRIGGER 2
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
The TRIGGERS option prompts you to select trigger output connector 1 or 2. The
SDP-40HD includes three 12V DC trigger output connectors labeled PWR (power), 1, and
2. The PWR connector cannot be configured because its trigger output connector is
activated and deactivated when the SDP-40HD is activated and deactivated or placed into
standby. The other connectors can be configured for remote or program operation.
Selecting TRIGGER 1 or TRIGGER 2 displays the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu, to
configure the selected trigger output connector. The TRIGGER 1 SETUP menu is shown at
the right. See the next page for the TRIGGER 2 SETUP menu. The parameters on the left
side of the TRIGGER SETUP menus are identical regardless of whether TRIGGER 1 or
TRIGGER 2 is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. The
TRIGGER 1 SETUP menu (shown on this page) indicates factory default parameter settings
for TRIGGER 1.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
REMOTE ONLY
OFF
ON, OFF
Program Operation
OFF
ON, OFF
All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters – except the REMOTE ONLY parameter – are considered program operation parameters.
3-56
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VC
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
RECORD INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
TRIGGER 1 SETUP
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1mc
FILM
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc
SurEX
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1mc BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Setup
SDP-40HD
TRIGGER SETUP
(continued)
TRIGGER SETUP
TRIGGER 1
TRIGGER 2
REMOTE
REMOTE
TRIGGER 2 SETUP
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VC
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
RECORD INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
TRIGGER 2 SETUP
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1mc
FILM
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc
SurEX
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1mc BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
3-57
Setup
JBL
REMOTE ONLY
ON, OFF
•
Connectors can be associated with both the Zone 2 and
Record Zone inputs, but cannot be associated with Zone 2 only
or the Record Zone only.
Configures the selected trigger output connector for remote
operation. Select the ON setting to configure the selected
connector for remote operation. Select the OFF setting to configure
the selected connector for program operation. Refer to the Program
Operation Parameter description below for more information.
•
Connectors can be associated with multiple inputs and
listening modes at the same time.
SETUP
TRIGGER 1 OR TRIGGER 2
TRIGGERS
REMOTE ONLY
When configured for remote operation, the connector labeled 1
can be activated and deactivated with the MODE + and – buttons
when the Zone 2 command bank is activated, and the connector
labeled 2 can be activated and deactivated with the MODE + and –
buttons when the Record Zone command bank is activated.
Note:
When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to ON, all TRIGGER SETUP
menu program operation parameter settings are ignored.
PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS
SETUP
TRIGGERS
TRIGGER 1 OR TRIGGER 2
ON, OFF
Program Operation Parameter
Configures the selected trigger output connector for program
operation when the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF. Select
the ON setting to associate the selected connector with the
corresponding input(s) or listening mode(s).
When configured for program operation, the connector is activated
and deactivated when the associated inputs or listening modes are
activated and deactivated.
Note the following:
•
Trigger output connectors can be associated with individual
Main Zone inputs and listening modes.
3-58
Note:
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore
the factory-default version of the selected listening mode, the
corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu program operation parameter is
automatically set to OFF.
Setup
SDP-40HD
LOCK OPTIONS
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
Displays the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which protects the MODE
ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS, and SETUP menu branch parameter
settings from accidental changes.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
UNLOCKED
SETUP
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED
UNLOCKED
MODES
LOCKED
UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL
SETUP
Default Setting
Possible Settings
MODES
UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL
UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
SETUP
UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
MODES
SETUP
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
SETUP
Note the following:
•
When the MODES parameter is set to LOCKED, the up and
down arrows can still be used to adjust subwoofer output levels
applied to the selected listening mode when the Shift
command bank is activated.
•
When the SETUP parameter is set to LOCKED, the 2CH button
can still be used to adjust the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG
BYPASS parameter setting when the Shift command bank is
activated.
•
When the SETUP parameter is set to LOCKED, the 7/5 button
can still be used to adjust the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT
parameter setting when the Shift command bank is activated.
MODES
Protects the MODE ADJUST menu branch settings from accidental
changes. When LOCKED is selected, MODE ADJUST menu branch
settings – including all listening mode menu settings – cannot be
adjusted. When UNLOCKED is selected, all MODE ADJUST menu
branch settings can be adjusted.
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
Protects SETUP menu branch settings from accidental changes.
When LOCKED is selected, the SETUP menu branch settings cannot
be adjusted. When UNLOCKED is selected, the SETUP menu branch
settings can be adjusted.
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
LOCK OPTIONS
AUDIO CNTRL
Protects the AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings from
accidental changes. When LOCKED is selected, the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu branch settings cannot be adjusted. When
UNLOCKED is selected, the AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch
settings can be adjusted.
SETUP
Parameter
LOCK OPTIONS
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
3-59
Setup
3-60
JBL
4
Audio Controls
Audio Controls ............................................................................4-2
Audio Controls
JBL
AUDIO CONTROLS
Selecting the MAIN MENU AUDIO CONTROLS option opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu, to customize the Main Zone, Zone 2, and Record
Zone audio output connectors.
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
BASS
+0.0dB
TREBLE
+0.0dB
TILT EQ
+0.0dB
LOUDNESS
ON
BALANCE
<I>
FADER
<I>
ZONE2 BALANCE
<I>
RECORD BALANCE <I>
L<
•
>R
B<
The BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, LOUDNESS, BALANCE, and FADER
parameters affect the Main Zone audio output connectors. This
includes all Main Zone inputs and listening modes, except the
5.1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS listening modes.
•
The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter affects the Zone 2 audio
output connectors, including all Zone 2 inputs.
•
The REC BALANCE parameter affects the Record Zone audio
output connectors, including all Record Zone inputs.
ON
OFF
>F
-3.0 to +3.0dB
-6.0 to +6.0dB
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
BASS
+0.0dB
-6.0 to +6.0dB
TREBLE
+0.0dB
-6.0 to +6.0dB
TILT EQ
+0.0dB
-3.0 to +3.0dB
LOUDNESS
ON
ON, OFF
BALANCE
<|>
L< to <|> to >R
FADER
<|>
B< to <|> to >F
ZONE2 BALANCE <|>
L< to <|> to >R
REC BALANCE
L< to <|> to >R
<|>
AUDIO CONTROLS menu parameter descriptions begin on the next page.
4-2
Audio Controls
SDP-40HD
BASS
AUDIO CONTROLS
-6.0dB to +6.0dB
BASS
BASS
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE,
and Subwoofer L/R. The graph to the right indicates the frequency
response of all BASS parameter settings.
To control the bass from the remote control:
Press the Shift button:
•
Press the CD button to increase the BASS parameter setting in
0.5dB increments.
•
Press the TAPE button to decrease the BASS parameter setting
in 0.5dB increments.
•
Press the OSD button to set the BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ
parameters to +0.0dB.
The BASS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the
Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, and Subwoofer L/R.
4-3
Audio Controls
TREBLE
AUDIO CONTROLS
JBL
-6.0dB to +6.0dB
TREBLE
TREBLE
Controls the amount of boost or cut applied to the Main Zone
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center. The graph
shown at the right indicates the frequency response of all TREBLE
parameter settings.
To control the treble from the remote control:
Press the Shift button:
•
Press the PVR button to increase the TREBLE parameter setting
in 0.5dB increments.
•
Press the TUNER button to decrease the TREBLE parameter
setting in 0.5dB increments.
•
Press the OSD button to set the BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ
parameters to +0.0dB.
The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of boost or cut applied to the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.
4-4
Audio Controls
SDP-40HD
TILT EQ
AUDIO CONTROLS
-3.0 to +3.0dB
TILT EQ
TILT EQ
Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, and
Subwoofer L/R. This parameter setting affects the entire frequency
spectrum with a hinge point at 1kHz. As the setting increases,
frequencies higher than 1kHz are boosted while frequencies lower
than 1kHz are simultaneously cut. As the setting decreases,
frequencies higher than 1kHz are cut while frequencies lower than
1kHz are simultaneously boosted. The graph shown at the right
indicates the frequency response of all TILT EQ parameter settings.
To control the tilt EQ from the remote control:
Press the Shift button:
•
Press the GAME button to increase the TILT EQ parameter
setting in 0.2dB increments.
•
Press the AUX button to decrease the TILT EQ parameter setting
in 0.2dB increments.
•
Press the OSD button to set the BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ
parameters to +0.0dB.
The TILT EQ parameter controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, LFE, and Subwoofer L/R.
4-5
Audio Controls
LOUDNESS
AUDIO CONTROLS
JBL
ON, OFF
LOUDNESS
LOUDNESS
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically
applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front
L/R, Center, LFE, and Subwoofer L/R. When ON is selected,
loudness compensation is automatically applied based on volume
level. As volume level increases, the amount of low-frequency boost
automatically decreases. The loudness contour is optimized for
input sources calibrated to THX reference levels. When OFF is
selected, no loudness compensation is applied.
The graph shown at the right indicates the frequency response that
is automatically applied when the LOUDNESS parameter is set to
ON and Main Zone volume level is adjusted.
To control the loudness from the remote control:
Press the Shift button:
•
Press the TV button to turn the LOUDNESS on.
•
Press the SAT button to turn the LOUDNESS off.
The LOUDNESS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is
automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front
L/R, Center, LFE, and Subwoofer L/R.
4-6
Audio Controls
SDP-40HD
BALANCE
AUDIO CONTROLS
L< <|> >R
BALANCE
ZONE2 BALANCE
AUDIO CONTROLS
L< <|> >R
ZONE2 BALANCE
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Front L/R, SIDE L/R, and REAR L/R.
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 2 audio output
connectors.
To control the balance from the remote control:
To control the Zone 2 balance from the remote control:
Press the Shift button:
Press the ZONE button:
•
Press the MENU button to center the Main Zone balance.
•
Press the MENU button to center the Zone2 balance.
•
Press the or arrow buttons to adjust the Main Zone
balance left and right.
•
Press the or arrow buttons to adjust the Zone2 balance
left and right.
FADER
AUDIO CONTROLS
B< <|> >F
FADER
RECORD BALANCE
AUDIO CONTROLS
L< <|> >R
RECORD BALANCE
Controls the front-to-back balance of the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Front L/R, SIDE L/R, and REAR L/R.
Controls the left-to-right balance of the Record Zone analog audio
output connectors.
To control the fade from the remote control:
To control the balance from the remote control:
Press the Shift button:
Press the REC button:
•
Press the MENU button to center the Main Zone fader.
•
Press the MENU button to center the Main Zone balance.
•
Press the or arrow buttons to adjust the Main Zone fader
backward and forward.
•
Press the or arrow buttons to adjust the record balance
left and right.
4-7
Audio Controls
4-8
JBL
5
Mode Adjust
Mode Adjust ..............................................................................5-2
Listening Mode Activation ..........................................................5-2
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters ........................................ 5-3
Mode Buttons .......................................................................................... 5-4
Mode Family Selection Buttons ................................................................ 5-4
Listening Mode Descriptions ......................................................5-5
Listening Mode Menu Option & Parameter Descriptions ..........5-35
Mode – Parameter Relationships ..............................................5-43
Mode Adjust
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1
FILM
5.1
TV
5.1
MUSIC
*
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL*
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM*
MUSIC*
*
MUSIC
*
2-CHAN*
5.1mc
FILM
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc
*
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
* These listening mode
names differ depending
on the current input
source, speaker setup,
and parameter settings.
Refer to the Listening
Mode Descriptions
beginning on page 5-5
for more information.
5-2
JBL
MODE ADJUST
Selecting MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST displays the available
listening modes. Selecting a listening mode opens the corresponding
listening mode menu, to customize the selected listening mode. These
adjustments are applied immediately.
All listening mode menus are shown in the Appendix. The parameters
on the left side of the menus differ from listening mode to listening
mode. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Factory
default parameter settings are shown for each listening mode.
When the MODE ADJUST menu opens, the activated listening mode is
highlighted. To activate a different listening mode, you must use one
of the methods described in “Listening Mode Activation” below.
LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION
The SDP-40HD allows listening mode activation in the Main Zone.
Listening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES),
and analog sources. In some cases, the SDP-40HD automatically
activates a listening mode in response to certain commands. For this
reason, it is important to understand the three methods through
which listening mode activation occurs.
Listening modes activation occurs through:
•
The INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection
parameters.
•
The front panel or remote control Mode
•
The remote control mode family selection buttons (THX, Dolby
Digital, LOGIC 7, TVL, DTS, and MUSIC).
and
buttons.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION
PARAMETERS
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
NAME
HDMI IN
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
You can select four preferred listening modes for each Main Zone
input, including one listening mode each for 2-channel, Dolby
Digital, DTS(-ES), and 5.1-channel sources. The table below
indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to
select preferred listening modes.
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters
2-CH
D
Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel
sources
NAME
HDMI IN
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
CD
NONE
COAX-2
NONE
+0dB
NONE
NONE
MUSIC
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
RECORD IN
DIGITAL
RECORD ADVANCED
Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital
sources
Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS-(ES)
sources
5.1mc
CD INPUT SETUP
DVD1
1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
•
If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is
present, the L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a Dolby
Digital source is played, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode is
activated.
•
If the CD input is selected while a Dolby Digital source is
present, the 5.1 L7 MUSIC listening mode is activated. If the
DVD1 input is then selected to play a DTS(-ES) source, the DTS
or DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode is activated.
Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1-channel
sources
Preferred listening modes can be preselected so that when a
particular type of input source is played, the preselected listening
mode is activated on the selected input. For example, the DVD1 and
CD INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection
parameters are set as shown at the top of the next column.
Note:
Refer to the Selecting Preferred Listening Modes section that begins on
page 3-13 for more information.
5-3
Mode Adjust
JBL
MODE BUTTONS
MODE FAMILY SELECTION BUTTONS
Use the front panel and remote control Mode buttons to audition
listening modes with the current Main Zone input source. Press the
Mode + or – button to scroll up or down through the available
listening modes for the current Main Zone input source. For
example, if a 2-channel source is present in the Main Zone, the
Mode buttons can be used to audition 2-channel listening modes.
The remote control mode family selection buttons select a listening
mode within the corresponding mode family. Pressing a mode
family selection button activates the most appropriate listening
mode for the current Main Zone input source. For example,
pressing the L7 button while a 2-channel source is present in the
Main Zone activates the L7 FILM listening mode.
Scrolling occurs in the order shown on the MODE ADJUST menu.
The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left corner of
the Main Zone two-line status. The selected listening mode is
automatically activated when scrolling stops.
The table below indicates the listening modes associated with each
mode family selection button.
Input Source
Button
*
2-Channel
5.1 Dolby Digital
DTS(-ES)
5.1mc
N/A**†
THX*
DTS(-ES) THX*
5.1mc THX*
DOLBY PLII MOVIE†
DD 5.1 PLII MOV*
N/A**
N/A**
L7 FILM
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS(-ES) L7 FILM*
5.1mc L7 FILM
L7 TV
5.1 L7 TV
N/A**
N/A**
DTS Neo:6 CIN††
N/A**
DTS(-ES)*
N/A**
L7 MUSIC
5.1 L7 MUSIC
DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC*
5.1mc L7 MUSIC
These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker setup, and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section that begins on the
next page for more information. For 5.1 systems with only side or rear speakers (but not both), pressing the
button loads the DOLBY DIGITAL mode.
** The MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE message appears on the on-screen and front panel displays when the selected listening mode family does not offer a listening mode for the
current Main Zone input source.
† When a 7-speaker configuration is in use, the Dolby PLIIx variant of this mode is loaded.
†† The MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE message appears on the on-screen and front panel displays if the input has a sampling rate of 96kHz. This includes analog inputs converted to 96kHz.
5-4
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS
The SDP-40HD offers an assortment of listening modes for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), and analog sources. Listening mode descriptions
begin below and continue in the order shown on the MODE ADJUST menu. The table included with each description indicates the
corresponding listening mode menu parameters, as well as their factory default and possible parameter settings. All listening mode menus are
shown in the Appendix. Descriptions of the listening mode parameters begin on page 5-35.
FILM
MODE ADJUST
TV
FILM
MODE ADJUST
TV
This listening mode is designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel
stereo or matrix encoded film sources.
This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or
matrix encoded television broadcast sources.
LOGIC 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derives
seven channels from 2-channel input sources. Logic 7 also derives
full frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase
the perceived width, length and sense of envelopment of the
listening space. Logic 7 provides remarkable improvement
compared to other decoders.
LOGIC 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the
LOGIC 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for broadcast
sources.
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
AUTO AZIMUTH
ON
ON, OFF
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
AUTO AZIMUTH
ON
ON, OFF
FRONT STEERING
FILM
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
ON, OFF
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
SOUND STAGE
REAR
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-5
Mode Adjust
JBL
MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
MUSIC SURR
MODE ADJUST
MUSIC
This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or
matrix encoded music sources.
LOGIC 7 MUSIC is a proprietary listening mode based on the
LOGIC 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music
sources.
MUSIC SURR
The LOGIC 7 MUSIC SURR listening mode is designed for playback
of 2-channel stereo music sources recorded in real spaces and for
playback of recordings that contain added reverb. It is
recommended for classical music sources, which are often recorded
in real spaces with added reverb to enhance the stereo mix.
Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input source and sends
these sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard from all
directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that simulates
what listeners experience in real spaces.
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
FRONT STEERING
MSURR
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-6
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
PLIIx +
MODE ADJUST
&
PLII +
PLIIx +
OR
PLIIx MOV &
MODE ADJUST
PLII +
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II
that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or
7.1-channel surround sound from any native two-channel (stereo)
source. These modes are recommended for home theaters with THX
certified speakers. The PLIIx + THX listening mode is only available
when the front, side and rear speakers are present. The PLII listening
mode is available when the front and side speakers are present.
PLIIx MOV
PLII MOVIE
OR
PLII MOVIE
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II
that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or
7.1-channel surround sound from any native two-channel (stereo)
source. The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side
and rear speakers are present. The PLII listening mode is available when
the front and side speakers are present.
Note:
Note:
The PLIIx + THX mode does not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
The PLIIx MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and Dolby PLII MOV modes:
Dolby PLII(x) + THX encoding:
•
•
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in
home theaters without re-equalization.
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences
between the front and surround channels, which results in
smoother sound movements between them.
•
Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround encoded sources.
•
Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logic
decoding.
•
Are appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.
Dolby PLIIx MOV decodes seven channels from Dolby Surround
encoded sources. Dolby PLII MOVIE decodes five channels from
Dolby Surround encoded sources.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
Parameter
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-7
Mode Adjust
JBL
PLIIx MUS &
MODE ADJUST
PLIIx MUS
PLII MUSIC
OR
PLII MUSIC
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II
that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or
7.1-channel surround sound from any native two-channel (stereo)
source. The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side
and rear speakers are present. The PLII listening mode is available when
the front and side speakers are present.
PL +
MODE ADJUST
PL +
This mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround encoded
sources and decodes four channels: three front channels and one
mono surround channel with a high frequency rolloff above 7kHz.
This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX-certified
speakers.
Dolby PL + THX mode:
Note:
The PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
PANORAMA
OFF
ON, OFF
CTR WIDTH
3
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX
DIMENSION
NEUTRAL
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
SURROUND DLY
10ms
0 to 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-8
•
Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs
that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and may sound too bright when played back in home
theaters without re-equalization.
•
Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences
between the front and surround channels, which results in
smoother sound movements between them.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
PRO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
+
PRO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
+
The Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of Dolby
Surround encoded sources. It decodes four channels from Dolby
Surround encoded sources, and uses a mono surround channel
with a high frequency rolloff above 7kHz.
This mode is designed for playback of matrix encoded digital stereo
film sources. DTS NEO:6 derives six channels when both side and rear
speakers are present (rear channels will be in parallel). It derives five
channels when only side or rear speakers are present.
This mode is useful for comparison purposes, particularly with the
L7 FILM, Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and DTS Neo:6 CIN listening modes.
In addition to THX processing, THX re-equalization is applied to
simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most
films are mixed for movie theaters, and may sound too bright when
played back in home theaters without re-equalization.
Parameter
Setting
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-9
Mode Adjust
JBL
CIN &
MODE ADJUST
MUSIC
CIN
OR
MUSIC
These modes are designed for playback of matrix encoded digital
stereo film or music sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when
both side and rear speakers are present (rear channels will be in
parallel). It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are
present.
Parameter
Setting
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Note the following:
•
•
•
The DTS Neo:6 CIN or MUSIC listening modes cannot be
assigned as preferred listening modes for 2-channel sources.
However, when the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the
SDP-40HD automatically activates the DTS Neo:6 CIN or
MUSIC listening mode if the mode was active the last time a
2-channel source was present.
The SDP-40HD will not automatically activate a DTS Neo:6
listening mode unless a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is
present. The DTS Neo:6 listening modes are not available with
88.2kHz, 96kHz, or analog sources.
The DTS Neo:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with
the front panel or remote control Mode buttons. The DTS
Neo:6 CIN listening mode can also activated with the remote
control DTS button when a 2-channel input source is present.
5-10
NIGHTCLUB
MODE ADJUST
NIGHTCLUB
The NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of “dry” music
sources that benefit from the addition of room reflections,
especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording. The
NIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them to all
speakers except for the LFE speaker.
The NIGHTCLUB mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied
upon by a majority of recording engineers to add ambience to
recordings.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER DEPTH
11
0 to 18
SPEECH DETECT
ON
ON, OFF
SIZE
5m
4 to 20m
LIVENESS
196ms
30ms to 20.2s
PRE-DELAY
5ms
OFF, 1 to 100ms
ROLLOFF
9.0kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
EFFECT LVL
+3dB
-12 to +6dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
CONCERT HALL
MODE ADJUST
CHURCH
CONCERT HALL
MODE ADJUST
The CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sends
them to all speakers except for the LFE speaker.
The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied
upon by a majority of recording engineers to add ambience to
recordings.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER DEPTH
12
0 to 18
SPEECH DETECT
ON
SIZE
CHURCH
The CHURCH mode uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich,
smooth, reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium
listening spaces with long reverberation time relative to their size,
such as churches and chambers.
The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening mode
because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied upon by
a majority of recording engineers to add ambience to recordings.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
ON, OFF
CENTER DEPTH
5
0 to 18
20m
4 to 20m
SPEECH DETECT
ON
ON, OFF
LIVENESS
1.72s
30ms to 20.2s
SIZE*
20m
4 to 30m
PRE-DELAY
OFF
OFF, 1 to 100ms
MID RT*
1.56s
24ms to 24.3s
ROLLOFF
2.4kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
BASS RT*
1.87s
5ms to 48.6s
EFFECT LVL
-2dB
-12 to +6dB
PRE-DELAY
24ms
OFF, 1 to 100ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
ROLLOFF
2.4kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
EFFECT LVL
-3dB
-12 to +6dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
* BASS RT, MID RT, and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full
parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-11
Mode Adjust
JBL
CATHEDRAL
MODE ADJUST
PANORAMA
CATHEDRAL
MODE ADJUST
The CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode. It
uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth, reverberant
decay characteristic of large listening spaces with long reverberation time relative to their size, such as cathedrals.
The CATHEDRAL mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm that is relied
upon by a majority of recording engineers to add ambience to
recordings.
PANORAMA
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
EFFECT LVL
+4dB
-12 to +6dB
BASS CONTENT
STEREO
BINAURL, MONO, STEREO
LOW FREQ WIDTH
+0
-25 to +25dB
SURR ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
L< to <|> to >R
INPUT BALANCE
<|>
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CALIBRATION
Refer to page 5-13
CENTER DEPTH
12
0 to 18
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
SPEECH DETECT
ON
ON, OFF
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
SIZE*
30m
4 to 30m
MID RT*
3.72s
24ms to 24.3s
BASS RT*
4.47s
5ms to 48.6s
PRE-DELAY
23ms
OFF, 1 to 100ms
ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
EFFECT LVL
-8dB
-12 to +6dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
* BASS RT, MID RT, and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the
full parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-12
The PANORAMA mode is designed for playback of stereo and
matrix encoded sources. PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexicon
algorithms to move the stereo image outward from the front
speakers, producing a wider stereo field with greater depth.
Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening position
and front speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close to
either side of the display device, the effect is produced over a wider
area than when the front speakers are positioned at a large angle
from the display device.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
MODE ADJUST
PANORAMA
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT
SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg
LISTENER POS
+0
NOTE:
ENSURE THAT
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS
BEEN PROPERLY
PERFORMED
CALIBRATION
Select PANORAMA
CALIBRATION to open
the PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu shown
to the left, to calibrate the PANORAMA
listening mode. This listening mode must be
calibrated to take full advantage of its
effects.
For best results, you should center the
primary listening position between the front
left and right speakers as shown in the Center illustration at the top
of the next page. Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be
calibrated with varying results.
An external calibration source is required to calibrate the
PANORAMA listening mode. You should select a familiar stereo
source.
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
SOURCE
LEFT & RIGHT
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT
SPEAKER ANGLE
30deg
10deg to 90deg
LISTENER POS
+0
-127 to +127
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
To calibrate the Panorama listening mode, refer to the instructions
on the following page.
5-13
Mode Adjust
PANORAMA
JBL
(continued)
Front Left
Front Right
Front Left
Front Right
Front Left
Front Right
60
L127 ........ Center ......... R127
Left
Primary Listening Position
Center
To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:
1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary
listening position.
2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary
listening position are properly measured. To do this, perform
the following procedure:
Measure the distance between the primary listening position
a n d t h e f r o n t b a f f l e o f e a c h s p e a k e r. T h e n , s e t t h e
corresponding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to the
closest available value.
3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening
position is not centered between the front left and right
speakers as shown in the Center illustration (above), set the
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
LISTENER POS parameter to
compensate for the difference using the remote control
or
arrow button. Each increment within the –127 to +127
5-14
L127 ........ Center ......... R127
Right
parameter range represents about one-third of an inch.
Adjusting the offset more to the left will make the value more
negative; more to the right will make the value more positive.
The Left illustration shows the left of center position. The Right
illustration shows the right of center position.
4. Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT.
5. Begin playback of the external calibration source.
6. When playback of the external calibration source is in progress,
set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in
the right ear.
7. To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter
settings, set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT. If the
PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the sound
should be perceived to come from all around the primary
listening position. If not, go back to Step 1 and repeat the
calibration procudure.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
PARTY
MODE ADJUST
MONO LOGIC
PARTY
MODE ADJUST
MONO LOGIC
This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left
channel to Front, Side, and Rear Left channels and the right channel
to Front, Side and Rear Right channels, and sums the Left and Right
for the center. It is recommended for background music.
This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, uses proprietary
Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to
use all channels. This dramatically increases the perceived width
and sense of envelopment of the listening space.
Parameter
Settings
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
EFFECT LVL
-9dB
-12dB to +6dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
ACADEMY FILTER
ON
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
2-CHANNEL
This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left and
right channels to the Front L/R and Subwoofer channels. It is
recommended for two-speaker playback with subwoofers and for
comparison purposes with other listening modes.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
SUB L/R LVL
+0dB
OFF, -30dB to +12dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
Note:
When the remote control Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
TVL button activates the MONO LOGIC listening mode for 2-channel
sources.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-15
Mode Adjust
JBL
MONO SURROUND
MODE ADJUST
5.1
MONO SURROUND
FILM
MODE ADJUST
This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends the
mono source to all channels.
Parameter
Settings
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
5.1
FILM
The 5.1 L7 FILM mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode
designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital encoded film
sources, and provides remarkable improvement compared to other
decoders.
It derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources with
enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are
present, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived
length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
MONO
MODE ADJUST
MONO
This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends mono
sources to the center channel.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
SUB L/R LVL
+0dB
OFF, -30dB to +12dB
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1ms to 30ms
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0dB to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-16
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
5.1
5.1
TV
MODE ADJUST
5.1
MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
TV
5.1
MUSIC
This proprietary listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel Dolby Digital encoded broadcast sources. Based on the
5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 TV derives seven channels from
5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.
This proprietary listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel Dolby Digital encoded music sources. Based on the 5.1
L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from
5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.
Parameter
Possible Settings
Parameter
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING FILM
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
FRONT STEERING MUSIC
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
OFF, ON
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
OFF, ON
SOUND STAGE
REAR
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
5 SPKR ENHANCE ON
ON, OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OFF, 1ms to 30ms
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OFF, 1ms to 30ms
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0dB to +0.0dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0dB to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
Default Setting
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Default Setting
Possible Settings
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-17
Mode Adjust
,
MODE ADJUST
JBL
UL2Cin &
OR
SurEX
UL2Cin
OR
SurEX
These modes are designed for 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel
Dolby Digital film sources. They apply THX re-equalization to
simulate high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most
films are mixed for movie theaters, and might sound too bright
when played back in home theaters without re-equalization. THX
timbre matching is applied to minimize timbre differences between
the front and surround channels, which results in smoother sound
movements between them. These modes are recommended for
home theaters with THX certified speakers.
The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting,
and the speaker setup.
The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the
behavior of the THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX modes when
activated:
•
The THX ULTRA2 listening mode is available when both the side
and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is
engaged. THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the
SURROUND EX parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a
non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with or without
THX Surround EX encoding is detected.
•
The THX SurEX listening mode is available when both the side
and rear speakers are present and THX Surround EX decoding is
engaged. THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the
SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX
encoding is detected.
•
The THX listening mode is available when both Ultra2 and THX
Surround EX decoding are deactivated.
Note:
Some EX encoded sources are not flagged, and require manually
setting the SURROUND EX parameter to ON for EX decoding.
When THX Ultra2 decoding is active:
•
Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived
width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono
Input Source
Parameter Setting
5.1-Channel Dolby Digital
5.1-Channel THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital (Flagged)
5.1-Channel THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital (Non-Flagged)
SURROUND EX: AUTO
THX ULTRA2
THX SurEX
THX ULTRA2
SURROUND EX: ON
THX SurEX
THX SurEX
THX SurEX
SURROUND EX: OFF
THX ULTRA2
THX ULTRA2
THX ULTRA2
5-18
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround
field in home theaters.
•
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-37 for more
information.
When THX Surround EX decoding is active:
Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
MUSIC
This listening mode is designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital music sources, and cannot be activated unless side and rear
speakers are present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the
rear speakers. Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-37
for more information. For best results, place the rear speakers close
together in your home theater.
Note:
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
SURROUND EX
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
The THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front panel
or remote control Mode buttons.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-19
Mode Adjust
JBL
5.1 PLIIx MOV
MODE ADJUST
5.1 PLIIx MUS
5.1 PLIIx MOV
MODE ADJUST
The 5.1 PLIIx MOV (MOVIE) listening mode is designed to playback
7.1 discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film
sources. (The 5.1 PLIIx MOVIE listening mode can also be used with
other types of Dolby Digital sources with mixed results.) The seven
main channels are full frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to as
the LFE information, has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz. The
5.1 PLIIx MOVIE listening mode does not appear in the list of
available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are
missing from the configuration.
The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode cannot be assigned as the
preferred listening mode. However, the USE LAST parameter allows
you to gain quick access to this mode.
To set up USE LAST using the remote control:
1. Select Main Menu Setup Inputs DVD1 (or the desired input).
2. In the INPUT SETUP menu, select
D
USE LAST.
3. Press the MENU button to leave the menu structure.
4. Play the source material, then press the
button. This will
load 5.1 PLIIx MOV for 5.1-CH Dolby encoded sources.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
Refer to page 5-33
Refer to page 5-34
AUTO, ON, OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
-10.0 to +0.0dB
5.1 PLIIx MUS
The 5.1 PLIIx MUS (MUSIC) listening mode is designed to playback 7.1
discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music
sources. (The 5.1 PLIIx MUSIC listening mode can also be used with
other types of Dolby Digital sources with mixed results.) The seven
main channels are full frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to as
the LFE information, has a limited frequency range of up to 120Hz. The
5.1 PLIIx MUSIC listening mode does not appear in the list of
available listening modes if either the side or rear speakers are
missing from the configuration.
The 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode cannot be assigned as the
preferred listening mode. However, the USE LAST parameter allows
you to gain quick access to this mode.
To set up USE LAST using the remote control:
1. Select Main Menu Setup Inputs DVD1 (or the desired input).
2. In the INPUT SETUP menu, select
5-20
USE LAST.
3. Press the MENU button to leave the menu structure.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
Refer to page 5-33
Refer to page 5-34
AUTO, ON, OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
-10.0 to +0.0dB
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
D
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
DIGITAL &
MODE ADJUST
DIGITAL EX
DIGITAL
OR
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the EX
DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoding is detected.
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when the
EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a
non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or
without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.
DIGITAL EX
These listening modes are designed to decode and playback 5.1
discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. The five
main channels are full frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to
as the LFE information, has a limited frequency range of 120Hz.
The mode name differs depending on the encoding present in the
input source, the EX DECODING parameter setting, and the
speaker setup.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby
Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding.
This listening mode can also be used with other types of
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results. The table at
the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior of
the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated.
Note:
The SDP-40HD cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in
non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do
not include information in the input signal that identifies Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoding.
The Dolby DIGITAL listening mode is available when both the side
and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is not activated.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when both the
side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is activated. Matrix decoding is then applied to derive a
surround back channel from the other surround channels.
Input Source
Parameter Setting
5.1-Channel Dolby Digital
5.1-Channel Surround EX
(Flagged)
5.1-Channel Surround EX
(Non-Flagged)
EX DECODING: AUTO
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
EX DECODING: ON
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
EX DECODING: OFF
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
5-21
Mode Adjust
JBL
DIGITAL &
MODE ADJUST
DIGITAL EX
DIGITAL
OR
(continued)
MODE ADJUST
DIGITAL EX
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EX DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 2-CHANNEL
This mode, recommended for recording purposes, is designed for
converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital encoded input sources into
2-channel Logic 7-encoded output signals.
The downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent to
the front speakers and subwoofer.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER MIX
+0dB
-25 to +5dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
-5 to +5dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
+0
-127 to +127
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
-5 to +5dB
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-20.0 to +0.0dB
SUB L/R LVL
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-22
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
5.1 MONO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO SURR
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO LOGIC
This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital
Encoded mono sources, uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms
to realistically expand mono sources to use all channels. This
dramatically increases the perceived w idth and sense of
envelopment of the listening space.
Note that:
•
•
5.1 MONO SURR
This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital
Encoded mono sources, sends mono signals to all channels.
Parameter
Settings
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
When a 1.0 Dolby Digital source is present, the SDP-40HD
automatically activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the TVL
button activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode for
5.1-channel sources.
5.1 MONO
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EFFECT LVL
-9dB
-12 to +6dB
ACADEMY FILTER
ON
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
SUB L/R LVL
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital
Encoded mono sources, sends mono signals to the center channel.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-23
Mode Adjust
JBL
DECODING
The DTS and DTS-ES listening modes are designed for, at a
minimum, playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix
encoded DTS-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete encoded DTS-ES
sources.
DTS and DTS-ES listening mode names differ depending on the
encoding present in the input source, the DECODING parameter
setting, and the speaker setup.
DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is
activated. The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions
for the behavior of DTS-ES decoding when it is activated.
•
DTS-ES decoding is activated when both the side and rear
speakers are present, the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON
or AUTO, and a 5.1-channel matrix encoded source is detected.
•
DTS-ES Discrete decoding is activated when both the side and
rear speakers are present, the ES DECODING parameter is set to
ON or AUTO, and a 6.1-channel discrete encoded DTS-ES
source is detected.
•
DTS-ES and DTS(-ES) Discrete decoding is deactivated when
the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF or when the ES
DECODING parameter is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel DTS
source is detected.
Note:
The table below is not applicable to the DTS-ES THX, DTS THX UL2Cin,
and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes.
Input Source
Parameter Setting
5.1-Channel DTS
5.1-Channel
Matrix Encoded DTS-ES
6.1-Channel
Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES
ES DECODING: AUTO
DTS
DTS-ES
DTS-ES Discr
ES DECODING: ON
DTS-ES
DTS-ES
DTS-ES Discr
ES DECODING: OFF
DTS
DTS
DTS
5-24
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
FILM &
MODE ADJUST
FILM
FILM
OR
MUSIC &
FILM
MODE ADJUST
These proprietary listening modes use an advanced matrix to decode
seven channels from 5.1 and 6.1-channel film sources with enhanced
front steering. When both side and rear speakers are present, the
DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived length
and sense of envelopment of the listening space.
The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of
5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel
discrete encoded DTS-ES film sources. The listening mode name differs
depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ES
DECODING parameter setting, and the speaker setup.
MUSIC
MUSIC
OR
MUSIC
These proprietary listening modes, similar to the DTS(-ES) L7 FILM
listening mode, use an advanced matrix to decode seven channels
from 5.1- and 6.1-channel music sources with enhanced front steering
to provide remarkable sound improvement compared to other
decoders. They are designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel
DTS, 5.1-channel matrix encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel discrete
encoded DTS-ES music sources.
The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter setting,
and the speaker setup.
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
SOUND STAGE
REAR
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
ON, OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
ES DECODING
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
ES DECODING
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-25
Mode Adjust
JBL
&
UL2Cin
MODE ADJUST
OR
UL2Cin
The DTS THX UL2Cin (ULTRA2 CINEMA) and DTS-ES THX listening
modes allow 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel DTS sources. They
are designed for playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix
encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel DTS-ES discrete encoded film
sources. DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX are recommended for
home theaters with THX certified speakers. These modes apply:
•
THX re-equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that
occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in
home theaters without re-equalization.
When THX UL2Cin decoding is activated:
•
Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived
width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono
surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround
field in home theaters.
•
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-37 for more
information.
The DTS-ES THX listening mode
THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between
the front and surround channels, which results in smoother
sound movements between them.
The DTS-ES THX listening mode is available when both the side and
rear speakers are present and DTS-ES decoding is active.
The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present
in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter setting, and the
speaker setup.
DTS-ES decoding is activated when the ES DECODING parameter is
set to AUTO (the default) or ON and a 5.1-channel matrix encoded
or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.
The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode
The table on the next page shows the conditions for the behavior of
the DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX modes when activated:
•
The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and
rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is activated.
To activate DTS THX UL2Cin decoding:
1. Press MODE ADJUST
2. Use the
or
DECODING.
arrow to select either AUTO (the default) or OFF.
When the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF, the DTS THX
ULTRA2 listening mode is always active. When the parameter is set
to AUTO, the DTS THX ULTRA2 listening mode activates when a
5.1-channel DTS source is detected.
5-26
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
ES DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
Input Source
Parameter Setting
5.1-Channel DTS
5.1-Channel
Matrix Encoded DTS-ES
6.1-Channel
Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES
ES DECODING: AUTO
DTS THX UL2Cin
DTS-ES THX
DTS-ES THX, DTS-ES Discr
ES DECODING: ON
DTS-ES THX
DTS-ES THX
DTS-ES THX, DTS-ES Discr
ES DECODING: OFF
DTS THX UL2Cin
DTS THX UL2Cin
DTS THX UL2Cin
MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
,
,
MODE ADJUST
MUSIC
The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel DTS music sources when the side and rear speakers are
present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear
speakers. Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-37 for
more information. This mode is recommended for home theaters
with THX certified speaker setups.
DISCR, &
OR
OR
MATRIX
DISCR
OR
MATRIX
This mode decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from DTS-ES
sources. It is designed for playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel
matrix encoded DTS-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete encoded DTS-ES
sources.
The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter setting,
and the speaker setup. Refer to page 5-24 for more information.
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
Refer to page 5-34
ES DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
CUSTOM
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Note:
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front
panel or remote control Mode buttons.
5-27
Mode Adjust
JBL
2-CHAN &
MODE ADJUST
5.1mc
2-CHAN
2-CHAN
OR
FILM
MODE ADJUST
2-CHAN
These modes, recommended for recording purposes, send
downmixed 5.1-channel or 6.1-channel DTS-ES input signals to the
front speakers and subwoofer as 2-channel Logic 7-encoded output
signals.
5.1mc
FILM
The 5.1mc LOGIC 7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon
listening mode that uses Logic 7 decoding to derive seven channels
from 5.1-channel film sources with enhanced front steering.
This listening mode allows 5.1-channel sources to use bass
management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and
audio controls (tone controls).
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER MIX
+0dB
-25 to +5dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
-5 to +5dB
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
+0
-127 to +127
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
-5 to +5dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-20.0 to +0.0dB
SOUND STAGE
REAR
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
ES DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
SUB L/R LVL
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-28
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
5.1mc
MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
5.1mc
5.1mc
MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
The 5.1mc LOGIC 7 MUSIC listening mode is similar to the 5.1mc
LOGIC 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music
sources. This mode is designed and recommended for playback of
5.1-channel music sources.
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
15.3kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
, 5.1mc
5.1mc
UL2Cin, & 5.1mc
OR
5.1mc
UL2Cin
OR
5.1mc
SurEX
SurEX
The 5.1mc THX, 5.1mc THX UL2Cin, and 5.1mc THX SurEX listening
modes are designed to convert 5.1-channel film sources that lack THX
Surround EX encoding into seven channel audio. The modes also
allow 5.1-channel sources to use bass management, speaker
crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio controls (tone
controls). The 5.1mc THX, 5.1mc THX UL2Cin, and 5.1mc THX
SurEX listening modes are recommended for home theaters with
THX-certified speakers. These modes apply:
•
THX re-equalization to simulate high frequency rolloffs that
occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie
theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in
home theaters without re-equalization.
•
THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between
the front and surround channels, which results in smoother
sound movements between them.
The listening mode name differs depending on the SURROUND EX
parameter setting, and the speaker setup.
The table below indicates the conditions in which THX Ultra2 and
THX Surround EX decoding are activated.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Input Source
Parameter Setting
5.1-Channel
5.1-Channel THX Surround EX
(Flagged)
5.1-Channel THX Surround EX
(Non-Flagged)
SURROUND EX: ON
5.1mc THX SurEX
5.1mc THX SurEX
5.1mc THX SurEX
SURROUND EX: OFF
5.1mc THX UL2Cin
5.1mc THX UL2Cin
5.1mc THX UL2Cin
5-29
Mode Adjust
5.1mc
MODE ADJUST
JBL
, 5.1mc
5.1mc
UL2Cin, & 5.1mc
OR
5.1mc
UL2Cin
OR
5.1mc
SurEX
(continued)
SurEX
The 5.1mc THX UL2Cin listening mode
The 5.1mc THX listening mode
The 5.1mc THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side
and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is active. THX
Ultra2 decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX parameter is
set to OFF. When THX Ultra2 decoding is activated:
The 5.1mc THX listening mode is available when neither THX Ultra2
nor THX Surround EX decoding is active.
•
•
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived
width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono
surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround
field in home theaters.
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
SURROUND EX
OFF
ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.
Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-37 for more
information.
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
The 5.1mc THX SurEX listening mode
The 5.1mc THX SurEX listening mode is available when both side
and rear speakers are present and THX surround EX decoding is
active. THX Surround EX decoding is activated when the
SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON.
When THX Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is
applied to derive three surround channels from 5.1-channel
sources.
5-30
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
5.1mc
MODE ADJUST
5.1mc STANDARD
MUSIC
5.1mc
MODE ADJUST
MUSIC
The 5.1mc THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel music sources. It cannot be activated unless side and
rear speakers are present. This mode performs best in home
theaters where the rear speakers are placed close together.
ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer
to the ASA parameter description on page 3-37 for more
information.
5.1mc STANDARD
This mode allows 5.1-channel sources to use bass management,
speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio controls
(tone controls). When these features are not used, the 5.1mc
STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5.1a BYPASS listening
mode. The 5.1mc STANDARD mode sends identical signals (with
appropriate time delays) to the Main Zone audio output connectors
labeled Side L and Rear L, as well as Side R and Rear R.
Parameter
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Note:
The 5.1mc THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front
panel or remote control Mode buttons.
5-31
Mode Adjust
JBL
5.1mc 2-CHAN
MODE ADJUST
5.1a BYPASS
MODE ADJUST
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
This mode downmixes 5.1-channel input signals into 2-channel
Logic 7-encoded output signals. It sends these signals to the front
speakers and the subwoofer. It is recommended for recording
purposes, particularly for recording from a DVD-A or multi-channel
SACD player to a CD-R or another 2-channel recording format.
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel sources, such as DVD-A or
SACD players.
•
Sends the 5.1-channel audio input connector directly to the
Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors as
shown on page 1-5 and page 3-47. These signals receive no
internal processing.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
•
CENTER MIX
+0dB
-25 to +5dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
-5 to +5dB
When both side and rear speakers are present, surround
channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.
To configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUT LEVELS
menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF to deactivate the
associated surround speakers.
•
The 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated
whenever a 5.1-channel analog source is present and the MAIN
ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. The 5.1a
BYPASS listening mode is only available for 5.1-channel analog
sources.
•
Pressing the remote control SHIFT then 2CH buttons toggles
the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON
and OFF.
CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0
-127 to +127
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
-5 to +5dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-20.0 to +0.0dB
SUB L/R LVL
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Option/Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 5-33
CUSTOM
Refer to page 5-34
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
Note:
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances, and audio controls (tone)
are not available when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated.
5-32
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
2CH BYPASS
MODE ADJUST
2CH BYPASS
This listening mode sends 2-channel analog audio input signals to
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R with no
internal processing.
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated
whenever a 2-channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADV
menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. The 2CH BYPASS
listening mode is not available when a digital source is present and
the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO.
Pressing the remote control SHIFT then 2CH buttons toggles the
MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter between ON and
OFF.
Note:
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances, and audio controls (tone)
are not available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated.
OUTPUT LEVELS
MODE ADJUST
OUTPUT LEVELS
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUB L/R
LFE
Listening Mode
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is
used to adjust output levels for the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled
Center, Subwoofer L/R, LFE, Side L/R, and
Rear L/R.
The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode
menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate
multichannel output signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter
appears. For example, the MONO listening mode OUTPUT LEVELS
menu includes a SUB L/R LVL parameter.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
SIDE L/R
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
REAR L/R
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
SUB L/R (LVL)
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
LFE
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
See page 5-35 for detailed parameter descriptions.
5-33
Mode Adjust
JBL
CUSTOM
MODE ADJUST
Listening Mode
CUSTOM
Opens the CUSTOM menu shown below, which can be used to
compare custom and factory default versions of the selected listening
mode and to restore the factory default version of the selected listening
mode.
Listening Mode
3. When finished, press the
arrow button to close the CUSTOM
VS PRESET drop down menu.
RESET MODE
CUSTOM VS PRESET
MODE ADJUST
2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop-down menu is
open, press the remote control
or
arrow button to toggle
between the PRESET (factory default) and CUSTOM versions of
the selected listening mode.
CUSTOM
MODE ADJUST
Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory default
versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected, the
listening mode is heard in its factory default condition, as if all listening
mode menu parameters were set to their factory default settings.
When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its custom
condition, including all current listening mode menu parameter settings.
The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode will
sound identical when all listening mode menu parameters are set to
their factory default settings.
The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening mode
menu parameter settings.
PRESET
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
RESET MODE
Restores the factory default version of the selected listening mode,
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default
settings.
To restore the factory default version of the selected listening mode:
1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE
option. The PRESS RIGHT V TO RESTORE MODE message
appears on the on-screen display.
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE
Note:
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE
Listening Mode
CUSTOM VS PRESET
PRESS RIGHT V
TO RESTORE MODE
2. Press the
arrow button to restore the factory default version of
the selected listening mode. Press the
arrow button to close the
message without restoring the factory default.
Note:
To toggle between the custom and factory default versions of
the selected listening mode:
1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the
CUSTOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.
5-34
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the
factory default version of the selected listening mode, the corresponding
TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is automatically set to its
initial factory default setting.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION & PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON, OFF
Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.
When set to ON, the SDP-40HD provides an increased sense of
spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers. This
enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers are
positioned to the sides of the primary listening position, or when the
primary listening position is located against the rear wall. The effectiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For best
results, place the surround speakers to the left and right of the primary
listening position. Available in all Logic 7 modes.
ACADEMY FILTER
ON, OFF
Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the SDP-40HD
continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automatically
adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to ensure
that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with maximum
separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the selected listening
mode varies among sources. Set this parameter to ON for film and
broadcast sources and to OFF for music sources. Available in L7 FILM
and L7 TV modes.
BASS CONTENT
BASS ENHANCE
ON, OFF
Enhances stereo bass, which results in low frequency reproduction
that is less localized and more realistic in the listening space. The
effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies depending on
room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to
reproduce low frequencies. For best results, use front, side or rear
speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of 40Hz or
lower. Available in all Logic 7 modes.
ON, OFF
Restores the proper tonal balance of older mono film sources that have
much narrower frequency responses than more recent mono film
sources. Available in MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.
AUTO AZIMUTH
with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for sources recorded
with stereo bass. Available in PANORAMA mode.
BINAURAL, MONO, STEREO
BASS RT
5ms to 48.6s
Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount
of time required for low frequency information to decay below 60dB
in level. In smaller listening spaces, the BASS RT parameter setting
should match the MID RT parameter setting for more natural effects.
Available in CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.
CAUTION!
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
CALIBRATION
Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, which is
used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to
“PANORAMA” on page 5-12 for more information. Available in
PANORAMA mode.
Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono and stereo recordings.
When set to BINAURAL, low frequency compensation is activated.
Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded with dummy
head microphones. Select the MONO setting for sources recorded
5-35
Mode Adjust
JBL
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION & PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
CENTER
OFF, -30 to +12dB
Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center.
Available in all except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS,
DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1mc 2-CHAN), MONO and 5.1
MONO modes.
CENTER DEPTH
0 to 18
Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,
changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher
settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance
of the center speaker from the listening position. Available in
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL modes.
CENTER MIX
-25 to +5dB
Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. Set this
parameter to +0dB for film sources and -5dB for music sources.
Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, and 5.1mc 2-CHAN
modes.
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
-127 to +127
Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. Set this
parameter to +0 unless the center channel is not properly timed
and the value of the error is known. Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL,
DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, and 5.1mc 2-CHAN modes.
COMPRESSION
AUTO, ON, OFF
Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialog intelligibility
at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources. When ON, full
compression is applied regardless of volume level. When OFF,
compression is not applied. Set this parameter to AUTO or ON for
Dolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels,
especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others. Available in
5-36
(continued)
all 5.1 Dolby Digital modes, except for 5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO
SURR, and 5.1 MONO.
CTR WIDTH
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX
Adjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is heard
from just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center image is
heard as a “phantom” center image from the front left and right
speakers. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center image is heard in
various combinations of the front and center speakers. Available in
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.
CUSTOM
Opens the CUSTOM menu, which is used to compare custom and
factory default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore
the factory default version of the selected listening mode. Available in
all modes.
CUSTOM VS PRESET
Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory default versions
of the selected listening mode. Refer to page 5-34 for information.
Available in all modes.
DIMENSION
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which is useful with
certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among all
speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced towards
the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the sound
field is balanced at the center of the listening space. When set to
REAR, the sound field is balanced towards the rear of the listening
space. Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
EFFECT LVL
-12 to +6dB
Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode. Available
in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA,
MONO LOGIC, and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.
ES DECODING
AUTO, ON, OFF
Controls DTS-ES decoding, which extracts a rear channel from
5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix encoded DTS-ES, and
6.1-channel discrete encoded DTS-ES sources. When ON is selected,
DTS-ES decoding is activated for all DTS-ES sources. When OFF is
selected, DTS-ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS-ES sources.
When AUTO is selected, DTS-ES decoding is activated when a
5.1-channel matrix encoded or a 6.1-channel discrete encoded
DTS-ES source is detected. DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when a
5.1-channel DTS source is detected.
DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is
engaged. DTS listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is
not engaged. Refer to the DTS-ES Decoding section that begins on
page 5-24 for more information.
Note the following:
•
DTS-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear
speakers are present.
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control DTS button while a DTS(-ES) source is present
adjusts the ES DECODING parameter, cycling through the
AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.
•
The DTS-ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the
ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5.1-channel DTS
source is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to
AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix encoded or 6.1-channel
discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is present.
This parameter is available in all DTS modes except for dts THX
MUSIC.
EX DECODING
AUTO, ON, OFF
Controls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding, which extracts a rear
channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with or
without Dolby Digital Surround EX. When ON, Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
sources. When OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is
disengaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
When AUTO is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is
engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded
with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected. Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non-flagged
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby
Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.
Note:
The SDP-40HD cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoding in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged
input source does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the
input signal.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby
Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The Dolby DIGITAL
listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is not engaged. Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX & Dolby
DIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-21 for
more information.
5-37
Mode Adjust
JBL
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION & PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
(continued)
Note the following:
LFE
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless
both side and rear speakers are present.
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or
Dolby DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the
EX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON, and
OFF settings.
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled LFE. The OUTPUT LEVELS menu does not include the LFE
parameter unless an LFE subwoofer is present. Available in all 5.1
Dolby Digital modes, except 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1
MONO SURR, and 5.1 MONO. Also available in 5.1mc L7 FILM, 5.1mc
L7 MUSIC, 5.1mc THX, 5.1mc THX MUSIC, 5.1mc STANDARD, 5.1a
BYPASS, DTS L7 FILM, DTS L7 MUSIC, DTS THX, DTS THX MUSIC, and
DTS modes.
This parameter is available in 5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS, and
DOLBY DIGITAL (EX) modes.
FRONT STEERING
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center
speakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied to the
center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering is
applied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.
When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. You should set this
parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources and to MUSIC,
MSURR or OFF for music sources. Available in L7 TV, L7 MUSIC, L7
MUSIC SURR, 5.1 L7 TV, 5.1 L7 MUSIC, dts L7 MUSIC, , and 5.1mc L7
MUSIC modes.
INPUT BALANCE
L< to <|> to >R
Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input
connectors, compensating for audio input sources with audible
channel imbalance. Available in PANORAMA mode.
LFE MIX
OFF, -30.0 to +12dB
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB
Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a
5.1-channel or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the audio
output labeled Subwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven other
channels may be combined with the LFE information to create the
subwoofer output signal, which significantly increases subwoofer
output levels.
Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper
tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload. When the
speaker setup does not include a subwoofer, LFE information is mixed
into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu
parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points. Available in
all DTS and all Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO
LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO), and all 5.1mc modes except
5.1mc STANDARD and 5.1a BYPASS modes.
LISTENER POS
-127 to +127
Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered
between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within the
-127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of an inch.
5-38
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
Refer to the Panorama Calibration section that begins on page 5-12 for
more information. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode.
Note:
The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend past the location of the
front left and right speakers.
LIVENESS
-5 to +5dB
Adjusts the output level of the current mode. Available in 5.1 2CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN modes.
MID RT
PANORAMA
ON, OFF
When set to ON, Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening
modes extend the front stereo image to include surround channel
signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.
Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.
-25 to +25
Applies low frequency spatial correction to the input signal. This
correction is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz.
Available in PANORAMA mode.
MASTER LEVEL
Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is used to adjust output
levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center,
Subwoofer L/R, LFE, Side L/R, and Rear L/R. Refer to page 5-33 for
more information. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1
2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN, and
2CH BYPASS modes.
30ms to 20.2s
Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter
adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic
more reflective surfaces and increase decay time. Available in
NIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes.
LOW FREQ WIDTH
OUTPUT LEVELS
24ms to 24.3s
Works with the BASS RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount
of time required for mid-frequency information to decay below
60dB in level. The full parameter range might not be available
depending on the SIZE parameter setting. Available in CHURCH and
CATHEDRAL modes.
Note:
The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx
MUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separate
PANORAMA listening mode found on page 5-12.
PRE-DELAY
1 to 100ms, OFF
Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of
reverberation. Higher settings make the simulated space sound
larger. Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, you
should begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting, then
make adjustments accordingly. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT
HALL, CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL modes.
CAUTION!
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT or SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
5-39
Mode Adjust
JBL
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION & PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
RE-EQUALIZER
ON, OFF
(continued)
ROLLOFF
Simulates high frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.
When set to ON, the SDP-40HD applies a high frequency filter.
When set to OFF, the SDP-40HD does not apply a high frequency
filter. You should set this parameter to ON for film sources, as many
films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright
when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.
Available in L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX,
5.1 L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS(-ES) L7
FILM, 5.1 L7 MUSIC, DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC, DTS THX ULTRA2, DTS(ES) THX, 5.1mc L7 FILM, 5.1mc L7 MUSIC, 5.1mc THX ULTRA2,
5.1mc THX SurEX, and 5.1mc THX modes.
SIDE L/R
REAR DLY OFFSET
SIZE
OFF, 1 to 30ms
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the
arrival time of rear speaker signals. You should increase the setting
when using side and rear speakers that are located close together or
when a greater sense of depth is desired in the listening space.
Available in All Logic 7 modes and PANORAMA mode.
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. You
should begin with a low setting to simulate high frequency
absorptive spaces. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL,
CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL modes.
-30 to +12dB, OFF
Controls the level of the Side L/R audio output connectors in the
Main Zone. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1
2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN, and
2CH BYPASS modes.
4 to 20 or 30m
Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or
30m range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of
the space to increase the reverb effect. Available in NIGHTCLUB,
CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL modes.
CAUTION!
REAR L/R
-30 to +12dB, OFF
Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled
R ea r L /R. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1
2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN, and
2CH BYPASS modes.
RESET MODE
Restores the factory default version of the selected listening mode,
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory
default settings. Available in all modes.
5-40
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a
high value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
SOUND STAGE
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
Dynamically controls the relative balance of the audio output
connectors. When set to FRONT, the Side L/R and Rear L/R output
levels are attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance of the
sound field to the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL,
the Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB,
shifting the perceived balance of the sound field to the center of the
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
listening space. When set to REAR, the Side L/R and Rear L/R output
levels are not attenuated, preserving the intended balance of the
sound field. Available in all Logic 7 modes.
SOURCE
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT
Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode
external calibration source signal. When RIGHT is selected, the
sound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening
position. When LEFT is selected, the sound is perceived to come
from the left of the primary listening position. When LEFT & RIGHT
is selected, the sound is perceived to come from all around the
primary listening position. Refer to the Calibration section that
begins on page 5-13 for more information about the SOURCE
parameter. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.
Note:
synthesis. When strong monaural speech is present in the input source,
the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and the
stereo component of the effect is increased. When set to OFF, the
amount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled. Available in
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL modes.
SUB L/R & SUB L/R LVL
OFF, -30 to +12dB
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Subwoofer L/R. The SUB L/R parameter appears
on the listening mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu. The SUB L/R LVL
parameter appears on listening mode menus when the listening
mode does not accommodate multi-channel output signals.
Available in all modes.
SURR ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound,
although both the front left and right speakers generate the external
calibration source signal.
Applies high frequency attenuation control to the audio output
connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only applied to
output signals generated by the SDP-40HD. Available in all Logic 7,
PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC, and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.
SPEAKER ANGLE
SURROUND DLY
10 to 90deg
Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the
primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the angle
between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening
position. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-13
for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter.
Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.
SPEECH DETECT
0 to 15ms
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the
arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is
recommended that you increase the setting when a greater sense of
depth is desired in the listening space. Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC
and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.
ON, OFF
Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set to
ON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural echo
in monaural speech. When stereo input sources are present, the front
left and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambience
5-41
Mode Adjust
JBL
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION & PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
SURROUND EX
AUTO, ON, OFF
(continued)
Note the following:
Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be used to
extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When
ON is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is selected, THX
Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
sources. Available in THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, and THX modes.
•
The SURROUND EX parameter AUTO setting is not available for
the 5.1mc THX listening modes.
•
Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting produces low
level clicks in the front speakers.
•
THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both
side and rear speakers are present.
When AUTO is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged
when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX
Surround EX encoding is detected. THX Surround EX decoding is
not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source
with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control THX button while a 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
source is present activates the THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, or THX
listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the SURROUND EX
parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control THX button while a 5.1-channel PCM source is
present activates the 5.1mc THX ULTRA2, 5.1mc THX SurEX, or
5.1mc THX listening mode. Subsequent presses toggle the
SURROUND EX parameter between the ON and OFF settings.
Note:
The SDP-40HD cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX encoding in
non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source
does not include information in the input signal that identifies THX
Surround EX encoding.
THX Surround EX listening modes are available when Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is engaged. THX or THX ULTRA2 listening
modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is not
engaged. Refer to the THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, & THX listening
mode descriptions that begin on page 5-18 or the 5.1mc THX
ULTRA2, 5.1mc THX SurEX, & 5.1mc THX listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-29 for more information.
SURROUND MIX
-5 to +5dB
Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to the
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is recommended that
you set this parameter to +2dB or +3dB for all input sources. Available
in 5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, and 5.1mc 2-CHAN modes.
VOCAL ENHANCE
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
Controls the level of dialog boost in the audio output connector
labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility,
particularly at lower volume levels. Available in all Logic 7 modes.
5-42
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
MODE – PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS
The following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used.
The parameter...
Is used in these modes
5 SPKR ENHANCE
All L7 modes
ACADEMY FILTER
MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC
AUTO AZIMUTH
L7 FILM and L7 TV
BASS CONTENT
PANORAMA
BASS ENHANCE
All L7 modes
BASS RT
CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes
CALIBRATION
PANORAMA
CENTER
All except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1mc 2-CHAN),
MONO, and 5.1 MONO modes
CENTER DEPTH
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL
CENTER MIX
5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN
COMPRESSION
All 5.1DD modes, except for 5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, and 5.1 MONO.
CTR WIDTH
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC
CUSTOM
All modes
CUSTOM VS PRESET
All modes
5-43
Mode Adjust
JBL
The parameter...
Is used in these modes
DIMENSION
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC
EFFECT LVL
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC, and 5.1 MONO LOGIC
ES DECODING
All DTS modes, except for DTS THX MUSIC
EX DECODING
5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS, and DOLBY DIGITAL (EX).
FRONT STEERING
L7 TV, L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, 5.1 L7 TV, 5.1 L7 MUSIC, DTS L7 MUSIC, and 5.1mc L7 MUSIC
INPUT BALANCE
PANORAMA
LFE
All 5.1 Dolby Digital modes except 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, and 5.1 MONO.
5.1mc L7 FILM, 5.1mc L7 MUSIC, 5.1mc THX, 5.1mc THX MUSIC, 5.1mc STANDARD, 5.1a BYPASS, DTS L7 FILM,
DTS L7 MUSIC, DTS THX, DTS THX MUSIC, and DTS
LFE MIX
All DTS and Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO), and
all 5.1mc modes except 5.1mc STANDARD and 5.1a BYPASS
LISTENER POS
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
LIVENESS
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL
LOW FREQ WIDTH
PANORAMA
MASTER LEVEL
5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN
MID RT
CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes
OUTPUT LEVELS
All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN, and
2CH BYPASS modes
PANORAMA
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC
PRE-DELAY
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL modes
5-44
Mode Adjust
SDP-40HD
The parameter...
Is used in these modes
RE-EQUALIZER
L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1 L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 MUSIC, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX
SurEX, THX, DTS(-ES) L7 FILM, DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC, DTS THX ULTRA2, DTS(-ES) THX, 5.1mc L7 FILM, 5.1mc L7
MUSIC, 5.1mc THX ULTRA2, 5.1mc THX SurEX, and 5.1mc THX
REAR DLY OFFSET
All L7 modes and PANORAMA
REAR L/R
All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN, and
2CH BYPASS modes
RESET MODE
All modes
ROLLOFF
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL modes
SIDE L/R
All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN, and 2CH
BYPASS modes
SIZE
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL modes
SOUND STAGE
All L7 modes
SOURCE
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SPEAKER ANGLE
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SPEECH DETECT
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, and CATHEDRAL
SUB L/R & SUB L/R LVL
All modes
SURR ROLLOFF
All L7 modes, PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC, and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes
SURROUND DLY
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC
SURROUND EX
THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, 5.1mc THX ULTRA2, 5.1mc THX SurEX, and 5.1mc THX
SURROUND MIX
5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1mc 2-CHAN
VOCAL ENHANCE
All L7 modes
5-45
Mode Adjust
5-46
JBL
6
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
Troubleshooting..........................................................................6-2
Routine Maintenance ..................................................................6-4
Restoring Factory-Default Settings...............................................6-5
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
JBL
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Make sure all associated power amplifiers are powered on.
The SDP-40HD does not power on.
3. Make sure the SDP-40HD is receiving an audio signal. To do
this, follow the instructions that begin on page 1-21 to open
the STATUS menu for the current input source.
1. Make sure the rear panel power switch is set to the I (“on”)
position.
2. Attempt to power on the SDP-40HD with the front panel
Standby button and remote control On button.
3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between
the rear panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.
4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.
The remote control does not work.
1. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the
front panel IR receiver. When the SDP-40HD is not using the
rear panel IR IN connector, the remote control must be in line
of sight with the front panel IR receiver for proper operation.
The remote control might also become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.
2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted
with the proper polarity.
3. Replace the remote control batteries. When the batteries are
low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage
condition that prevents it from operating the SDP-40HD.
The SDP-40HD is powered on, but there is no audio.
1. Examine the audio cables to ensure a good connection
between the source and the SDP-40HD, and the SDP-40HD
and all associated power amplifiers.
6-2
4. Make sure the audio is not muted. The message “MUTE ON” or
“FULL MUTE ON” appears in the on-screen and front panel
displays when the audio is muted. To deactivate mute, press the
Mute button or adjust the volume level.
5. Check the INPUT SETUP menu HDMI IN, DIGITAL IN, and
ANALOG IN parameters to ensure the appropriate audio
connector is assigned to the selected input.
The relationship between the HDMI inputs and analog and
digital outputs depends on the settings of the DIGITAL IN
parameter and the HDMI IN parameter. Refer to the table on
page 3-7 for assigning HDMI audio.
•
When HDMI IN is set to NONE and DIGITAL IN is set to
HDMI AUDIO, then the COAX-1 connector is automatically
assigned to DIGITAL IN. This is in place of any previously
assigned HDMI connector. Neither audio nor video will be
available on the HDMI output.
•
When HDMI IN is set to one of the HDMI connectors and
DIGITAL IN is set to a parameter other than HDMI AUDIO,
then both HDMI audio and video are active on the HDMI
output connector.
6. The associated source device may not incorporate HDCP
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) encryption.
HDCP is a copy protection technology incorporating an
encryption and authentication scheme to protect certain digital
audio and video content from being copied as it travels across
DVI or HDMI connections. Since the SDP-40HD supports HDCP,
associated equipment connected via HDMI or DVI (Digital
Visual Interface) must also support HDCP. Check your
manufacturer user guide to confirm HDCP compatibility.
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
SDP-40HD
7. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can be
increased with the front panel volume knob or the remote
control VOL + and – buttons.
No audio when using a HDMI to DVI cable or adaptor between
the SDP-40HD and the display.
Because DVI does not carry an audio signal, no audio will be heard.
Use the SDP-40HD analog or digital output connectors for audio.
2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu HDMI IN, VIDEO IN and
COMPONENT IN parameters to ensure the appropriate video
connector is assigned to the selected input.
3. The currently selected source, or the high-definition display
device may incorporate HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection) encryption. HDCP is a copy protection
technology inccorporating an encryption and authentication
scheme to protect certain digital audio and video content from
being copied as it travels across DVI or HDMI connections.
•
If your display device is not compatible with HDCP, use an
analog video connection from the source device, through
the SDP-40HD, to the display. Analog video connectors are
not copy protected. (The resolution through these
connectors may not be the same as it would through the
HDMI connector.)
•
If using a video switcher or scaler, be sure it is HDCP
compliant.
Dialog sounds muffled.
If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make sure a
custom – as opposed to a THX – speaker setup is selected. Then,
make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set to
NONE.
A humming sound is present in the audio.
1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from
the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground
loop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or the
cable provider for assistance.
2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.
Once the problem is identified, make sure the associated
component is properly grounded and connected to the same
electrical circuit as the SDP-40HD.
The SDP-40HD is powered on, but there is no video.
1. Examine the video cables – particularly the HDMI cables – to
ensure a good connection to the associated component.
The picture on the display screen includes video artifacts and
looks incorrect.
The loaded disc may include an analog video copy-prevention
signal, such as Macrovision. Check the manufacturer user guide
that came with your display device to find out whether it is
compatible with Macrovision.
RF interference is present in the audio or video.
1. Make sure the SDP-40HD is not positioned near unshielded TV
or FM antennas, cable TV decoders, and other devices that
emit radio frequencies (RF).
2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever
possible.
6-3
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
JBL
The SDP-40HD is exhibiting erratic behavior.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1. Set the rear panel power switch to the c (“off”) position. Wait
10 seconds. Then, set the rear panel power switch to the
I (“on”) position.
The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that should
be performed on a periodic basis.
2. Use the SDP-40HD configuration tool to download the current
SDP-40HD configuration to a personal computer (PC) or
document all of your current settings on the installation
worksheet that begins on page A-19. Then, follow the
instructions on the next page to restore factory default settings.
•
Clean the SDP-40HD exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth.
Do not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners, or strong
commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel wool
or metal polish. If the SDP-40HD is exposed to a dusty
environment, a low-pressure blower can be used to remove
dust from its exterior surface.
If all else fails. . .
•
Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote
control requires two AA batteries. When these batteries are low
on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition
that prevents it from operating the SDP-40HD. Normal
operation will resume when new batteries are installed.
1. Contact an authorized JBL dealer.
2. Contact JBL Customer Service at 818-830-8757.
Note:
Visit http://www.jbl.com for additional troubleshooting information.
6-4
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
SDP-40HD
RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS
When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and
v a l u e s t h a t t h e o w n e r h a s d e f i n e d a re r e s t o re d t o t h e ir
factory-default settings. Before restoring factory-default settings,
you should record all of your current settings.
FACTORY SETTINGS
4. Press the remote control
or
arrow button to highlight
RESTORE DEFAULTS, then press the
arrow button. (To close
the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factory default
settings, highlight EXIT, then press the
arrow button.)
The FACTORY SETTINGS message appears on the front panel
and on-screen displays. When this message appears, press a
front panel or remote control button to restart the SDP-40HD.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS
HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART
To restore factory-default settings:
1. Select one of the following options to record user defined settings:
•
Use the Configuration Tool to download current SDP-40HD
settings to a personal computer (PC). The configuration
tool is available at www.jblsynthesis.com
•
Record the settings you have defined on the installation
worksheet that begins on page A-19.
2. If the SDP-40HD is not in standby mode, press the Standby
Button.
3. When standby mode is activated, press the Standby Button
again, then quickly press and hold the Mute button until the
FACTORY SETTINGS menu shown above opens on the
on-screen and front panel displays.
Note:
The Mute button must be pressed within 2 seconds of deactivating
standby mode. Otherwise, the “MUTE ON” message will appear on
the on-screen and front panel displays. If this occurs, too much time
has passed. Press the Standby button and begin again at step 3.
6-5
Troubleshooting & Maintenance
6-6
JBL
A
Appendix
Specifications ................................................................................ 2
Declaration of Conformity............................................................. 4
Menu Tree .................................................................................... 5
Installation Worksheet ................................................................ 19
Appendix
JBL
SPECIFICATIONS
HDMI Input & Output Connectors
HDMI Inputs
• 6 HDMI Type A (19-pin) connectors
HDMI Output
• 1 HDMI Type A (19-pin) connector
HDMI Performance mmmmm
Video Resolutions
Audio Sample Rates
• 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i (resolutions dependent on the
capability of the HDMI display connected to the
SDP-40HD HDMI output connector)
Analog Audio Inputs
• 8 stereo (RCA) or 5 stereo and one 5.1-channel connectors
Digital Audio Inputs
• 6 S/PDIF coaxial (RCA), 6 S/PDIF optical, and 1 AES/EBU
(XLR) connectors
• Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC958, S/PDIF standards
• Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz sample rates
• Accepts 16-24 bits PCM audio, Dolby Digital, DTS and
DTS-ES discrete data formats
• 12 unbalanced (RCA) and 12 balanced (XLR, SDP-40HD
Balanced only) connectors for Front L/R, Center, LFE,
Subwoofer L/R, Side L/R, and Rear L/R, and Auxiliary L/R
Zone 2 Audio Outputs • 2 unbalanced (RCA, 1 fixed and 1 variable output level)
stereo connectors and 1 balanced stereo connector
(XLR, variable output level, SDP-40HD Balanced only)
Record Zone Audio
Outputs
A-2
A/D Conversion
• 24-bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ΔΣ architecture
D/A Conversion
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multi-bit ΔΣ architecture
Frequency Response
• 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/-0.25dB, -0.75dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz
THD + Noise
• Below 0.003% at 1kHz, maximum output level
Dynamic Range
• 108dB minimum, 111dB typical, 22kHz bandwidth
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
• 108dB minimum, 111dB typical, 22kHz bandwidth
Input Sensitivity
• 200mVrms (2Vrms for maximum output level) at 0dB
input gain
Input Impedance
• 100kΩ in parallel with 150pF
Output Level
• 150mVrms typical, 6Vrms maximum (RCA connectors)
• 300mVrms typical, 12Vrms maximum
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume at
+12dB
Output Impedance
• 100Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)
• 50Ω in parallel with 150pF (XLR connectors, SDP-40HD
Balanced only)
• 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
Audio Input & Output Connectors
Main Zone Audio
Outputs
Main Zone Audio Performance
• 2 unbalanced (RCA, 1 fixed and 1 variable output level)
stereo connectors
• 1 S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and 1 S/PDIF optical connector
(in parallel)
Zone 2 & Record Zone Audio Performance
A/D Conversion
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 96kHz, dual-bit ΔΣ architecture (Record
Zone only)
D/A Conversion
• 24-bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multi-bit ΔΣ architecture
Frequency Response
• 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/-0.25dB, -0.75dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz
THD + Noise
• Below 0.005% at 1kHz, maximum output level
Dynamic Range
• 105dB minimum, 108dB typical, 22kHz bandwidth
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
• 105dB minimum, 108dB typical, 22kHz bandwidth
Input Sensitivity
• 200mVrms (4Vrms for maximum output level)
Input Impedance
• 100kΩ in parallel with 150pF
Appendix
SDP-40HD
Zone 2 & Record Zone Audio Performance
Component Video Performance
Output Level
Switching
• Passive
Impedance
• 75Ω
Output Impedance
• 200mVrms typical, 4Vrms maximum (RCA connectors)
• 400mVrms typical, 8Vrms maximum (XLR connectors,
Zone 2 only)
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume at
0dB
Insertion Loss
• <3dB
Bandwidth
• >250MHz
• 100Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)
• 50Ω in parallel with 150pF (XLR connectors, Zone 2 only)
Microphone Input Connectors
Inputs
• 4 3.5 miniature phone jacks
Video Input & Output Connectors
Input Sensitivity
• 10mVrms (400mV maximum input level)
Video Inputs
• 2 composite (RCA), 3 S-video, and 4 component video (3
RCA and 1 BNC))
Input Impedance
• 20kΩ (accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals)
Video Outputs
• 4 composite (RCA, 2 main and 2 Record Zone), 2 S-video
(2 monitor and 2 Record Zone), and 1 component (BNC)
Other
Trigger Outputs
• 1 power on/off and 2 programmable connectors on
detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)
RS-232 Serial Input/
Output
• 2 9-pin D-sub connectors
• NTSC, PAL, and SECAM
Switching
• Active
Power Requirements
Output Level
• 1.0V peak-to-peak
• 90-250 VAC, 50-60Hz, 120W (universal line input),
detachable power cord
Impedance
• 75Ω
SDP-40HD
Dimensions &
Weight
•
•
•
•
Rack Mounting
• Optional brackets are available for installation in a
standard 19" equipment rack (4 rack units required)
Environment
• Operating Temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
• Storage Temperature: -30° to 75°C (-22° to 167°F)
• Relative Humidity: 95% maximum without condensation
Remote Control
• Hand-held, backlit infrared remote control unit
• Requires 2 AA batteries (Alkaline batteries recommended)
Composite & S-video Performance
Compatibility
Input Return Loss
• >40dB
Differential Gain
• <0.3%
Differential Phase
• <0.3°
Bandwidth
• >25MHz
K Factor
• <0.3%
Gain
• ±0.15dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio • >70dB
Frequency Response
• 10Hz to 8MHz + 0.2dB/-0.3dB
Height (with feet): 6.63 inches (169mm)
Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)
Depth: 14.85 inches (377mm)
Weight: 45lbs (20.5kg)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Component Video Performance
Compatibility
• 3-channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent
A-3
Appendix
JBL
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Application of Council Directive(s):
89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC
Standard(s) to Which Conformity is Declared:
EN55013:2001, EN55020:2002, EN61000-3-2:2000,
EN61000-3-3:2001, and EN60065:2002
Manufacturer:
Harman Specialty Group
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
The equipment identified here conforms to the Directive(s)
and Standard(s) specified above.
Type of Equipment: Digital Controller
Model:
JBL SDP-40HD
Date:
October 2005
Harman Specialty Group
Vice President of Engineering
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
Tel: 781-280-0300
Fax: 781-280-0490
A-4
Appendix
SDP-40HD
MENU TREE
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
Selecting SETUPTRIGGERS prompts the
selection of a trigger output connector.
Selecting a connector opens the TRIGGER
SETUP menu shown at the far right. The
parameters on the left side of the TRIGGER
SETUP menu are identical regardless of the
selected connector. The TRIGGER SETUP
menu indicates factory-default parameter
settings for both connectors.
INPUT SETUP
REAR PANEL CONFIG
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
8 STEREO INPUTS
OR
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG
MAIN POWER ON -30dB
MUTE LEVEL FULL MUTE
ZONE PWR ON
-30dB
REC PWR ON
-30dB
MAX VOLUME
+6dB
8 STEREO INPUTS
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
LAST LVL, -80 to +6dB
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
FOR REAR PANEL CFG
continued on page A-7
-10dB
-20dB
-30dB
-40dB
FULL MUTE
SPEAKER SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SDP-40HD
>
continued on page A-11
OFF, 1 to 60ms
ON
OFF
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
TRIGGER SETUP
TRIGGER 1
TRIGGER 2
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
2 SECONDS
STATUS
TOP
POSITION
NTSC
FORMAT
ON
BACKGROUND
ON
REMOTE STATE
ON
OFF
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
LOCK OPTIONS
MODES
UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED
SETUP
UNLOCKED
LOCKED
UNLOCKED
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
ALWAYS ON
STATUS
75%
BRIGHTNESS
100%
75%
50%
25%
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
OFF
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
TRIGGER 1 SETUP
ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
RECORD INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
SurEX
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
TRIGGER SETUP
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1mc
FILM
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc
SurEX
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TOP
CENTER
BOTTOM
SECAM
PAL
NTSC
ON
OFF
A-5
Appendix
SDP-40HD
TRIGGER SETUP
TRIGGER 1
TRIGGER 2
TRIGGER 2 SETUP
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VC
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
RECORD INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
TRIGGER 2 SETUP
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1mc
FILM
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc
SurEX
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1mc BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
A-6
Appendix
SDP-40HD
MENU TREE (continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
LD INPUT SETUP
SAT INPUT SETUP
LD
NONE
CD INPUT SETUP
NAME
HDMI IN
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-1
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
VIDEO
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
RECORD IN
ANLG
RECORD ADVANCED
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL-2
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-3
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
NONE
COMPONENT IN
4
2-CH
TV
D
5.1
TV
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DIGITAL IN
COAX-2
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
NONE
COMPONENT IN
NONE
2-CH
MUSIC
D
5.1
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
RECORD IN
DIGITAL
RECORD ADVANCED
DIGITAL IN
HDMI
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-6
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DIGITAL IN
HDMI
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-8
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
NONE
COMPONENT IN
NONE
2-CH
MUSIC
D
5.1
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1mc 5.1mc
MUSIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DVD2 INPUT SETUP
TV INPUT SETUP
VCR INPUT SETUP
PVR INPUT SETUP
TAPE INPUT SETUP
AUX INPUT SETUP
NAME
HDMI IN
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
2
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL-1
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-2
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-2
COMPONENT IN
3
2-CH
TV
D
5.1
TV
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
RECORD IN
ANLG
RECORD ADVANCED
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
TV
NONE
NAME
HDMI IN
VCR
NONE
DIGITAL IN
NONE
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-4
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-3
COMPONENT IN
VIDEO
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
RECORD IN
ANLG
RECORD ADVANCED
NAME
HDMI IN
NAME
HDMI IN
CD
NONE
PVR
4
DIGITAL IN
HDMI
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-5
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
NONE
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
TV
D
5.1
TV
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
NAME
HDMI IN
TUNER INPUT SETUP
DVD1
1
DVD2
2
SAT
3
GAME INPUT SETUP
NAME
HDMI IN
NAME
HDMI IN
NAME
HDMI IN
Selecting SETUP INPUTS prompts the selection of the
desired input (for example, DVD1). Selecting an input
opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown
below. The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP
menus are identical regardless of which input is selected.
The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable.
Default parameter settings differ from input to input. The
INPUT SETUP menus shown below indicate default
parameter settings for each input.
NAME
HDMI IN
GAME
5
TAPE
NONE
DIGITAL IN
NONE
ANALOG IN
ANALOG-1
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
NONE
COMPONENT IN
NONE
2-CH
PRO LOGIC
5.1
MUSIC
D
MUSIC
5.1mc 5.1mc
MUSIC
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
ANLG
RECORD IN
ANLG
RECORD ADVANCED
NAME
HDMI IN
NAME
HDMI IN
TUNER
6
AUX
NONE
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL-3
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-2
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
MUSIC
D
5.1
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
RECORD IN
DIGITAL
RECORD ADVANCED
A-7
Appendix
JBL
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DIGITAL IN
HDMI
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
+0dB
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
DVD1 DIGITAL
DIGITAL IN
IN
DVD1
DVD1 INPUT NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
PRESS MENU TO
RESTORE INPUT NAME
>
EDIT INPUT NAME
DVD1
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
DVD1 DIGITAL IN
DVD1AUDIO
HDMI IN
HDMI
COAX-1
HDMI-1
COAX-2
HDMI-2
COAX-3
HDMI-3
COAX-4
HDMI-4
COAX-5
HDMI-5
COAX-6
HDMI-6
OPTICAL-1
NONE
OPTICAL-2
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
OPTICAL-5
OPTICAL-6
AES/EBU
NONE
A-8
HDMI AUDIO
COAX-1
COAX-2
ANALOG-3
COAX-3
ANALOG-4
COAX-4
ANALOG-5
COAX-5
ANALOG-6
COAX-6
ANALOG-7 5.1 ANLG (6-8)
OPTICAL-1
ANALOG-8
OPTICAL-2
NONE
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
OPTICAL-5
OPTICAL-6
AES/EBU
NONE
DVD1 ANALOG IN
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
ANALOG-6
ANALOG-7 5.1 ANLG (6-8)
ANALOG-8
NONE
OFF
+0.dB
AUTO
MANUAL
DVD1 2-CH MODE
+0.0dB
AUTO GAIN
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
R
-45
-18 to +12dB
ON
OFF
DVD1 VIDEO IN
COMPOSITE-1
COMPOSITE-2
S-VIDEO-1
S-VIDEO-2
S-VIDEO-3
NONE
DVD1 COMPONENT IN
COMPONENT-1
COMPONENT-2
COMPONENT-3
COMPONENT-4
VIDEO
NONE
DVD1
1
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
USE LAST
Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the
corresponding menu shown below. These menus
are identical regardless of which input is selected.
The MAIN ADV and RECORD ADV menus shown
on the next page indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.
DIGITAL
ANLG
DMIX
DVD1
5.1
5.1
5.1
D MODE
FILM
TV
MUSIC
DIGITAL
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
USE LAST
DVD1
MODE
FILM
MUSIC
2-CHAN
USE LAST
DVD1 5.1mc MODE
5.1mc FILM
5.1mc MUSIC
5.1mc
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
USE LAST
AUTO
OFF
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
DVD1 MAIN ADV
DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
HDMI OSD
ON
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
NORMAL
FAST
ON
OFF
DVD1 RECORD ADV
+0dB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
BLOCKED
ENABLED
INPUT
96kHz
88.2kHz
48kHz
44.1kHz
-18 to +12dB
Appendix
SDP-40HD
MENU TREE (continued)
The MAIN ADV menus indicate factory-default
parameter settings for each input.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DVD1 MAIN ADV
DVD2 MAIN ADV
LD MAIN ADV
TV MAIN ADV
DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
ON
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
ON
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
AUTO
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
ON
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
INPUT SELECT
ANALOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT
CD MAIN ADV
PVR MAIN ADV
GAME MAIN ADV
TAPE MAIN ADV
TUNER MAIN ADV
AUX MAIN ADV
DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
ON
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
INPUT SELECT
ANALOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT
AUTO
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
ON
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
ANALOG
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
ON
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
ANALOG
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
ON
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
ON
COMPONENT OSD
ON
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT NORMAL
AUTO
OFF
AUTO
ON
ON
ON
FAST
DVD1
HDMI
DIGITAL IN HDMI AUDIO
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
0dB
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
1
2-CH
FILM
D
5.1
FILM
FILM
5.1mc
5.1mc
FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
SAT MAIN ADV
AUTO
OFF
AUTO
ON
ON
ON
FAST
INPUT SELECT
ANALOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT
VCR MAIN ADV
AUTO
OFF
AUTO
ON
ON
ON
FAST
INPUT SELECT
ANALOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT
ANALOG
OFF
AUTO
ON
ON
ON
FAST
A-9
Appendix
JBL
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DVD1
1
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1
HDMI
NONE
+0dB
NONE
1
FILM
FILM
FILM
FILM
CD MAIN ADV
INPUT SELECT DIGITAL
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
OFF
COMPONENT OSD
A-10
The RECORD ADV menus indicate factory-default
parameter settings for each input.
5.1mc
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DMIX
RECORD IN
DMIX
RECORD ADVANCED
DVD1 RECORD ADV
DVD2 RECORD ADV
LD RECORD ADV
TV RECORD ADV
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
SAT RECORD ADV
VCR RECORD ADV
CD RECORD ADV
PVR RECORD ADV
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
BLOCKED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
BLOCKED
RECORD
GAME RECORD ADV
TAPE RECORD ADV
TUNER RECORD ADV
AUX RECORD ADV
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
BLOCKED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
+OdB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE 44.1kHz
ENABLED
RECORD
Appendix
SDP-40HD
MENU TREE (continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
CUSTOM
SPEAKERSETUP
SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
40 Hz
SYNTHESIS 7 CH SETUP
60 Hz
60 Hz
SPEAKER DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
C
APART
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
L
SL
RL
80Hz
80Hz
SYNTHESIS 7CH SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
80 Hz
FRONT L/R
80 Hz
CENTER
80 Hz
SIDE L/R
80 Hz
REAR L/R
SUB L/R
MONO
80 Hz
SUB XOVER
LFE
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART
80Hz
ON
OFF
PRESSING THE RIGHT
BUTTON WILL
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A
SYNTHESIS
7CH SPEAKER
CONFIGURATION
APART
CLOSE
TOGETHER
SYNTHESIS 7CH
7CH SETUP
SETUP
SYNTHESIS
REAR L/R
80 Hz
SUB
OFF
REARULTRA2
L/R
BGC
N/A
ASA L/R
REAR
THXAPART
80Hz
MONO
SUB L/R
SUB XOVER THX 80Hz
LFE
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB OFF
BGC
N/A
APART
REAR SPEAKERS
80Hz
NONE
ON
OFF
APART
CLOSE
TOGETHER
F R O N T L / R S P E AK E R S
CENTER SPEAKERS
SIDE L /R SPEAKERS
R EA R L / R S P E A K ER S
SUBWOOFERS L/R
SUB XOVER
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 80 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 00 Hz
1 10 Hz
1 20 Hz
NONE
MONO
STEREO
NONE
FULL
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
A-11
Appendix
JBL
MENU TREE (continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
REAR PANEL CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGERS
LOCK OPTIONS
SPEAKER
SETUP
CUSTOM
SPEAKER
SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKER
SETUP
CUSTOM
SETUP 40 Hz
CUSTOM
SETUP
SET CROSSOVERS
SYNTHESIS
SETUP
CHECK MICROPHONES
SYNTHESIS
77CH
CH SETUP
60 Hz
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
AUTOMATIC
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
60 Hz
LEVELS
CALIBRATION
60 Hz
MANUAL
40 RR
Hz
R
SR
OFF
SET
CROSSOVERS
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
N/A
BEFORE CALIBRATING
C
APART
LEVELS SPEAKER
CALIBRATION
MANUAL
SETUP
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
INTERNAL
NOISE TEST
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
R
SR
RR
60Hz
40Hz
C
80Hz
M
SUB
80Hz
L
80Hz
SL
80Hz
RL
M
SUB
L
SL RL
80Hz
INTERNAL NOISE
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
SETUP
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUB (MONO)
SUB RIGHT
LFE
UNITS
METERS
FEET
A-12
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
N/A
N/A
FEET
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
DACS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUB (MONO)
SUB RIGHT
LFE
CAL NOISE
L/R LIMITER
L/R LIMIT ADJ
LFE LIMITER’
LFE LIMIT ADJ
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
N/A
N/A
-18 to 12dB
ON
OFF
100dB
OFF
100dB
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
75 to 120dB
0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m
ON
OFF
Appendix
SDP-40HD
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
BASS
+0.0dB
TREBLE
+0.0dB
TILT EQ
+0.0dB
LOUDNESS
ON
BALANCE
<I>
FADER
<I>
ZONE2 BALANCE
<I>
RECORD BALANCE
<I>
L<
<l>
>R
B<
<l>
>F
ON
OFF
-3.0 to +3.0dB
-6.0 to +6.0dB
A-13
Appendix
JBL
MENU TREE (continued)
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
Selecting a listening mode
opens the corresponding listening mode menu (pages A14 to A-16). The parameters
on the left side of the listening
mode menus differ from mode
to mode. The parameter settings on the right side are
adjustable. The listening mode
menus shown here indicate
factory-default parameter settings for each listening mode.
Listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are
shown on pages A-16 to A-17.
A-14
MODE ADJUST
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
*
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL*
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM*
MUSIC*
*
MUSIC
*
2-CHAN*
5.1mc FILM
5.1mc MUSIC
5.1mc
*
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
FILM
ON
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
SOUND STAGE
REAR
OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
TV
ON
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FILM
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
+
PLIIx +
RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC
PLIIx MUS
PANORAMA
OFF
CTR WIDTH
3
NEUTRAL
DIMENSION
10ms
SURROUND DLY
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PLII +
ON
PLII MOVIE
MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MUSIC
NEUTRAL
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC SURR
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MSURR
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
CIN
PLIIx MOV
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CATHEDRAL
RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
NIGHTCLUB
CENTER DEPTH
11
SPEECH DETECT
ON
SIZE
5m
LIVENESS
196ms
PRE-DELAY
5ms
ROLLOFF
9.0kHz
EFFECT LVL
+3dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CONCERT HALL
PLII MUSIC
PANORAMA
OFF
CTR WIDTH
3
DIMENSION
NEUTRAL
SURROUND DLY
10ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CENTER DEPTH
12
SPEECH DETECT
ON
SIZE
20m
LIVENESS
1.72ms
PRE-DELAY
OFF
ROLLOFF
2.4kHz
EFFECT LVL
-2dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PL +
RE-EQUALIZER
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PRO LOGIC
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
CHURCH
5
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
ON
20m
SIZE
MID RT
1.56s
BASS RT
1.87s
24ms
PRE-DELAY
2.4kHz
ROLLOFF
-3dB
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CENTER DEPTH
12
SPEECH DETECT
ON
SIZE
30m
MID RT
3.72s
BASS RT
4.47s
PRE-DELAY
23ms
ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
EFFECT LVL
-8dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PANORAMA
EFFECT LVL
+4dB
BASS CONTENT STEREO
LOW FREQ WIDTH
+0
SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
INPUT BALANCE
<l>
CALIBRATION
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PARTY
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
2-CHANNEL
SUB L/R LVL
CUSTOM
+0dB
MONO LOGIC
EFFECT LVL
-9dB
ACADMY FILTER
ON
SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MONO SURROUND
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MONO
SUB L/R LVL
CUSTOM
+0dB
Appendix
SDP-40HD
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
SOUND STAGE
REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
COMPRESSION
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
SURROUND EX
AUTO
COMPRESSION
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OFF
+0.0dB
MUSIC
EFFECT LVL
-9dB
ACADEMY FILTER
ON
SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 MONO SURR
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
AUTO
DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 MONO
SUB L/R LVL
CUSTOM
+0dB
FILM
5.1 TV
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
FILM
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
COMPRESSION
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MUSIC
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
COMPRESSION
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 PLIIx MOV
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
5.1 PLIIx MUS
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
DIGITAL
EX DECODING
AUTO
COMPRESSION
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 2-CHANNEL
CENTER MIX
+0dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
COMPRESSION
OFF
+0.0dB
LFE MIX
+0dB
SUB L/R LVL
CUSTOM
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
SOUND STAGE
REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
DECODING
AUTO
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MUSIC
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
DECODING
AUTO
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
AUTO
DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
2-CHAN
CENTER MIX
+0dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0
+0dB
MASTER LEVEL
+0.0dB
LFE MIX
DECODING
AUTO
+0dB
SUB L/R LVL
CUSTOM
5.1mc
FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
SOUND STAGE
REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc
RE-EQUALIZER
SURROUND EX
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
OFF
+0.0dB
5.1mc
MUSIC
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1mc STANDARD
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1mc 2-CHAN
CENTER MIX
+0dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
SUB L/R LVL
+0dB
CUSTOM
5.1a BYPASS
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
2CH BYPASS
NO PARAMETERS
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MUSIC
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF 15.3kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
A-15
Appendix
JBL
MENU TREE (continued)
Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION, OUTPUT LEVELS, or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below. The CALIBRATION option is available
for the PANORAMA listening mode. The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes. These menus are identical regardless of which listening
mode is selected. Listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown below and on the next page.
PANORAMA
+4dB
EFFECT LVL
BASS CONTENT STEREO
+0
LOW FREQ WIDTH
SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms
<I>
INPUT BALANCE
CALIBRATION
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT
SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg
LISTENER POS
+0
NOTE:
ENSURE THAT
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS
BEEN PERFORMED
PROPERLY
MONO LOGIC
-9dB
EFFECT LVL
ON
ACADMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz
OUTPUT LEVELS 3.1kHz
CUSTOM
OUTPUT LEVELS
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUB L/R
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
MONO LOGIC
-9dB
EFFECT LVL
ON
ACADMY FILTER
+0
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS 3.1kHz
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE
Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop-down menu shown below and on the next page. These drop-down menus are identical
regardless of which listening mode is selected. However, certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode.
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
OFF
ACADEMY FILTER
BASS CONTENT
BINAURL
MONO
STEREO
BASS ENHANCE
ON
OFF
AUTO AZIMUTH
ON
OFF
A-16
CENTER
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CENTER DEPTH
ON
OFF
BASS RT
COMPRESSION
0 to 18
CENTER MIX
5ms to 48.6s
-127 to +127
-25 to +5dB
AUTO
ON
OFF
CTR WIDTH
MIN,1 to 6, MAX
CUSTOM VS PRESET
PRESET
CUSTOM
DIMENSION
FRONT
NEUTRAL
REAR
EFFECT LVL
-12 to +6dB
DECODING
AUTO
ON
OFF
EX DECODING
AUTO
ON
OFF
FRONT STEERING
OFF
MSURR
MUSIC
FILM
Appendix
SDP-40HD
INPUT BALANCE
L<
<l>
MASTER LEVEL
LFE MIX
MID RT
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB
CENTER MIX
-127
-5 to +5dB
>R
+0
LIVENESS
24ms to 24.3s
ON
OFF
PRE-DELAY
30ms to 20.2s
LOW FREQ WIDTH
-25 to +25
OFF, 1 to 30ms
REAR L/R
PANORAMA
+127
REAR DLY OFFSET
OFF, 1 to 100ms
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
OFF
OFF, -30 to 12dB
RESET MODE
PRESS RIGHT
TO RESTORE MODE
ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
SIZE
SPEECH DETECT
4 to 20 or 30ms
SOUND STAGE
FRONT
NEUTRAL
REAR
SOURCE
ON
OFF
SUB L/R
OFF, -30 to 12dB
SUB L/R LVL
RIGHT
LEFT & RIGHT
LEFT
SPEAKER ANGLE
10 to 90deg
OFF, -30 to 12dB
SURROUND ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
SURROUND DLY
0 to 15ms
SURROUND EX
AUTO
ON
OFF
SURROUND MIX
+5 to +5dB
VOCAL ENHANCE
+6.0dB
+3.0dB
+0.0dB
SIDE L/R
OFF, -30 to 12dB
A-17
Appendix
JBL
MENU TREE (continued)
FACTORY SETTINGS
Refer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section that begins on page 6-5 for more information.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS
HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART
Refer to the Status Menus section that begins on page 1-21 for more information.
2CH STATUS
S
D STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
EX ENCODED
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
R
> S
STATUS
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
C
R
SL SR
STATUS
STATUS
WORD
WORD LENGTH
LENGTH
SAMPLE
SAMPLE RATE
RATE
S
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
LFE
-45
-45
2CH STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
dB L
0
-6
-15
-30
-45
A-18
R
S
HDMI STATUS
HDMI CONNECTOR
VID FMT
VERT RATE
AUD IN
AUDIO FMT
CHANNELS
SAMPLE RATE
HDCP STATUS
S
5.1mc STATUS
> S
C
R
SL SR
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
LFE
R
SL SR
S
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
LFE
-45
-45
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
ENCODING
C
D STATUS
> S
S
2CH BYPASS STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
S
DIGITAL STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
S
Appendix
SDP-40HD
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET
INPUT SETUP
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
NAME
HDMI IN
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
D
5.1mc
MAIN ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT
ANALOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD
COMPONENT OSD
HDMI OSD
FORMAT DETECT
ZONE2 IN
RECORD IN
RECORD ADVANCED
ANLG IN LVL
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE
RECORD
A-19
Appendix
JBL
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET
(continued)
REAR PANEL CONFIG
SPEAKER SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
SYNTHESIS 7 CH SETUP
Circle one:
8 STEREO INPUTS
5 STEREO & 5.1 ANLG
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT
80Hz
CENTER
80Hz
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
SIDE LEFT/RIGHT
80Hz
MAIN PWR ON
REAR LEFT/RIGHT
80Hz
MUTE LEVEL
SUB LEFT/RIGHT
MONO
SUB XOVER
80Hz
LFE
OFF
ULTRA2SUB
OUTPUT LEVEL
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUB LEFT
SUB RIGHT
LFE
SETTING
L/R LIMITER
L/R LIMIT ADJ
LFE LIMITER
LFE LIMIT ADJ
A-20
MAX VOLUME
LOCK OPTIONS
AUDIO CONTROL
ASA
CAL NOISE
REC PWR ON
MODES
BGC
BASS PEAK LIMITER:
ZONE PWR ON
DISTANCE
SETUP
Appendix
SDP-40HD
DISPLAY SETUP
TRIGGER 1 SETUP
TRIGGER 2 SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
Circle all parameters set to ON.
Circle all parameters set to ON.
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
RECORD INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
RECORD INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx +
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII +
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL +
PRO LOGIC
+
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
STATUS
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
REMOTE STATE
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
STATUS
BRIGHTNESS
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
AUDIO CONTROLS
BASS
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
ZONE2 BALANCE
RECORD BALANCE
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1
FILM
5.1
TV
5.1
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1mc
FILM
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc
SurEX
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
PARTY
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1
FILM
5.1
TV
5.1
MUSIC
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1mc
FILM
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc
SurEX
5.1mc
MUSIC
5.1mc STANDARD
5.1mc 2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
A-21
Appendix
A-22
JBL
Index
Symbols
"PANORAMA", 5-12, 5-35
THX SurEX listening mode, 5-29–5-30
THX UL2Cin listening mode, 5-29–5-30
7/5 button, 2-14, 3-20, 3-38
8 STEREO INPUTS option, 3-47
Numerics
2.0 ENCODING parameter, 2-26
2CH
2CH button, 2-14
2CH BYPASS listening mode, 5-33
2CH BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-25
2-CH parameter, 3-14, 3-17
2CH STATUS menu, 2-22
2-CHANNEL listening mode, 5-15
2-channel mode family, 5-4
5 SPKR ENHANCE parameter, 5-35
5.1
2-CHANNEL listening mode, 5-22
ANALOG STATUS menu, 2-24
Dolby Digital mode family, 5-4
L7 FILM listening mode, 5-4, 5-16
L7 MUSIC listening mode, 5-4, 5-17
L7 TV listening mode, 5-4, 5-17
MONO listening mode, 5-23
MONO LOGIC listening mode, 5-23
MONO SURR listening mode, 5-23
5.1mc
2-CHANNEL listening mode, 5-32
5.1mc mode family, 5-4
BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-24
L7 FILM listening mode, 5-4, 5-28
L7 MUSIC listening mode, 5-4, 5-29
selection parameter, 3-14, 3-18
STANDARD listening mode, 5-31
THX listening mode, 5-4, 5-29–5-30
THX MUSIC listening mode, 5-31
A
AC input connector, 2-7
ACADEMY FILTER parameter, 5-35
access panel, removable, 2-7
advanced speaker array, 3-37
analog audio input connectors, 2-8
ANALOG BYPASS parameter, 3-20
ANALOG IN menu, 3-10
anamorphic trigger signals, 3-20
ANLG IN LVL parameter, 3-11
arrow buttons, 2-14
aspect ratio, 3-22
AUD IN status parameter, 2-26
AUDIO CNTRL parameter, 3-59
AUDIO CONTROLS menu, 4-2
audio input connectors, 2-6
audio output connectors, 2-6–2-8
AUTO AZIMUTH parameter, 5-35
AUTO GAIN parameter, 3-12
A/V SYNC DELAY parameter, 3-49
B
BACKGROUND display parameter, 3-52
BALANCE audio control parameter, 4-7
bass management
5.1mc STANDARD listening mode, 5-31
BASS audio control, 4-3
BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, 3-45–3-47
BASS RT parameter, 5-35
calibration noise signal (CAL NOISE), 3-46
in panorama mode (BASS CONTENT), 5-13, 5-35
limiting L/R bass output, 3-45–3-46
limiting LFE bass output, 3-45–3-47
low-frequency boost (LOUDNESS), 4-2, 4-6
PANORAMA low-frequency correction (LOW
FREQ WIDTH), 5-39
panorama low-frequency correction (LOW FREQ
WIDTH), 5-13
speaker setup, 3-27–3-37
stereo bass in L7 modes (BASS ENHANCE), 5-35
THX boundary gain compensation (BGC), 3-31,
3-37
TILT EQ audio control, 4-5
BIT RATE encoding parameter, 2-26
C
calibration
calibration noise signal (CAL NOISE), 3-46
manual, 3-40–3-47
panorama CALIBRATION parameter, 5-13, 5-35
speaker calibration parameters, 3-39
CATHEDRAL listening mode, 5-12
CENTER audio output parameter, 5-36
CENTER crossover setup parameter, 3-31, 3-33
CENTER DEPTH parameter, 5-36
CENTER MIX LVL parameter, 2-26
CENTER MIX parameter, 5-36
CHANNELS parameter, 2-26
CHURCH listening mode, 5-12
CNTR DLY SAMPLES parameter, 5-36
COMPONENT IN
menu, 3-13
parameter, 3-7
COMPRESSION parameter, 5-36
Index
CONCERT HALL listening mode, 5-11
crossover
high-pass filter, 3-29
low-pass filter, 3-29
setting crossover points, 3-37
CTR WIDTH parameter, 5-36
CUSTOM menu, 5-34, 5-36
CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-49
CUSTOM VS PRESET option, 5-34, 5-36
JBL
EX DECODING parameter, 5-21, 5-37
EX ENCODING status menu parameter, 2-26
DTS
DTS 2-CHAN listening mode, 5-28
DTS listening mode, 5-27
DTS Neo:6 CIN listening mode, 5-4, 5-10
DTS Neo:6 MUSIC listening mode, 5-10, 5-14
DTS STATUS menu, 2-23
DTS THX MUSIC listening mode, 5-27
DTS THX UL2 Cin listening mode, 5-26
DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN listening mode, 5-28
DTS(-ES) decoding, 5-24
DTS(-ES) DISCR listening mode, 5-27
DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode, 5-4, 5-25
DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC listening mode, 5-4, 5-25
DTS(-ES) listening mode, 3-14, 3-17, 5-4, 5-27
DTS(-ES) mode family, 5-4
DTS(-ES) THX listening mode, 5-4, 5-26
ES DECODING parameter, 5-24, 5-37
ES ENCODING status menu parameter, 2-26
D
Declaration of Conformity, A-4
DIALOG OFFSET parameter, 2-26
DIG OUT RATE parameter, 3-26
digital audio input connectors, 2-8
DIGITAL BYPASS parameter, 3-25
DIGITAL IN
menu, 3-9
parameter, 3-21, 3-24
DIGITAL STATUS menu, 2-25
DIMENSION parameter, 5-36
display
BRIGHTNESS parameter, 3-53
front panel, 2-3
SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-49
Dolby
Dolby Digital 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 5-4
Dolby Digital 5.1 L7 MUSIC listening mode, 5-4
Dolby Digital 5.1 L7 TV listening mode, 5-4
Dolby Digital 5.1 PLII MOV listening modes, 5-4
Dolby Digital 5.1 THX listening modes, 5-4
Dolby Digital EX listening mode, 5-21
Dolby Digital listening mode, 3-14, 3-17, 5-21
Dolby Digital STATUS menu, 2-23
Dolby PLII + THX listening mode, 5-7–5-8
Dolby PLII MOVIE listening mode, 5-4, 5-7
Dolby PLII MUSIC listening mode, 5-8
Dolby PLIIx + THX listening mode, 5-7
Dolby PLIIx MOV listening mode, 5-4, 5-7, 5-20
Dolby PLIIx MUS listening mode, 5-8, 5-20
Dolby PRO LOGIC listening mode, 5-9
I-2
E
EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-50
EFFECT LVL parameter, 5-11, 5-37
F
factory-default settings, restoring, 6-5
FADER parameter, 4-2, 4-7
FORMAT DETECT parameter, 3-22
FORMAT parameter, 3-52
FRONT L/R crossover setup parameter, 3-31–3-32
front panel
display, 2-3
display BRIGHTNESS parameter, 3-53
DISPLAY menu, 3-53
DISPLAY parameter, 3-49
IR receiver LEDs, 2-3
mode scroll buttons, 2-4
Mute button, 2-4
overview, 2-2–2-4
volume knob, 2-3
FRONT STEERING parameter, 5-38
H
HDCP, 3-7
HDMI
about, 1-2
assigning input connectors, 3-7–3-9
downmixed audio, 3-26
HDMI STATUS menu, 2-22
input connector locations, 2-5
output connector location, 2-5
status menu, 2-20
I
input
assigning connectors, 3-7
changing names, 3-5
configuring, 3-19
connectors, 2-6–2-8
INPUT BALANCE panorama parameter, 5-13, 5-38
INPUT parameter, 2-27
INPUT TYPE parameter, 2-27
main zone, 3-2
record zone, 3-2
restoring default names, 3-6
SELECT parameter, 3-20–3-21
selection buttons, 2-4
SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-4
INPUT SELECT parameter, 3-21
installation
considerations, 1-5
worksheet, A-19–A-21
internal noise test, 3-43
L
L/R LIMIT ADJ parameter, 3-45–3-46
Index
SDP-40HD
L/R LIMITER parameter, 3-45–3-46
level meters, 3-12
LEVELS CALIBRATION menu, 3-42
LFE
LFE MIX parameter, 5-38
LFE parameter, 3-31, 3-35, 5-38
LIMIT ADJ parameter, 3-45, 3-47
LIMITER parameter, 3-45–3-46
LFE MIX parameter, 5-27–5-30
LISTENER POS panorama parameter, 5-13, 5-38
listening modes
activating, 5-2
descriptions, 5-5
mode buttons, 5-4
parameter descriptions, 5-35
preferred, 3-14
preferred modes, 5-3
selecting a listening mode (MODE ADJUST), 5-2
LIVENESS parameter, 5-39
lock options
menu, 3-3
MODES parameter, 3-59
Logic 7
5.1mc L7 FILM listening mode, 5-4
5.1mc L7 MUSIC listening mode, 5-4
DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode, 5-4
DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC listening mode, 5-4
L7 FILM listening mode, 5-4–5-5
L7 MUSIC listening mode, 5-4, 5-6
L7 MUSIC SURR listening mode, 5-6
L7 TV listening mode, 5-4–5-5
remote control L7 button, 5-4
simulated 7-chan playback (5 SPKR ENHANCE), 5-35
LOUDNESS parameter, 4-2, 4-6
LOW FREQ WIDTH parameter, 5-13, 5-39
advanced menu, 3-19
connectors, 2-8
input selection buttons, 2-4
Off button, 2-4
preferred modes, 5-3
maintenance, 6-4
manual audio adjustments, 3-12
manual calibration, 3-40, 3-47
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-40
MASTER LEVEL parameter, 5-39
MAX VOLUME parameter, 3-55
menu
remote control MENU button, 2-14
setup menu, 2-17
tree, A-5–A-18
microphone
input connectors, 2-8
placement, 3-39
MID RT parameter, 5-12, 5-39
mix parameters
MIX ROOM, 2-27
SURR MIX LVL, 2-27
mode
buttons, 2-13
MODE parameter, 2-27
scroll buttons, 2-4
MONO listening mode, 5-16
MONO LOGIC listening mode, 5-15
MONO SURROUND listening mode, 5-16
Music button, 2-15
Mute button, 2-13
MUTE LEVEL parameter, 3-54
N
BACKGROUND parameter, 3-22
COMPONENT OSD parameter, 3-22
menu, 3-51
MUTE ON message, 2-4
OSD button. See remote control, 2-13
output connectors, 2-6–2-8
output levels
bass peak limiters, 3-45
manual calibration, 3-42
menu, 5-33
speaker calibration parameters, 3-39
P
PANORAMA
low-frequency correction (LOW FREQ WIDTH), 5-39
panorama
calibration, 5-13
INPUT BALANCE parameter, 5-13, 5-38
LISTENER POS panorama, 5-13, 5-38
listening mode, 5-12–5-14
low-frequency correction (LOW FREQ WIDTH), 5-13
PANORAMA parameter, 5-39
SOURCE parameter, 5-41
SPEAKER ANGLE parameter, 5-13, 5-41
parameters
listening mode menu, 5-35
program operation, 3-56
STATUS menu, 2-26
PLIIx MOV listening mode, 5-20
POSITION parameter, 3-51
power switch, 2-7
PRE-DELAY parameter, 5-39
preferred listening modes, selecting, 3-14
program operation parameters, 3-56, 3-58
NIGHTCLUB listening mode, 5-10
M
MAIN ADVANCED parameter, 3-19
MAIN PWR ON parameter, 3-54
main zone
about, 2-19
O
Off buttons, 2-4
on-screen display
R
REAR DLY OFFSET parameter, 5-40
REAR L/R crossover setup parameter, 3-31, 3-34
REAR L/R output level parameter, 5-40
I-3
Index
rear panel
CONFIG menu, 3-2
overview, 2-5–2-8
RECORD ADVANCED menu, 3-25
record zone
about, 2-19
ADVANCED menu, 3-25
analog audio input levels, 3-25
direct digital recording, 3-25
feedback loops, 3-26
input parameter, 3-23–3-24
input selection buttons, 2-4
Off button, 2-4
output connectors, 2-7
REC PWR ON parameter, 3-55
RECORD BALANCE parameter, 4-7
sample rates, 3-26
RE-EQUALIZER parameter, 5-40
remote control
arrow buttons, 2-16
back-light, 2-11
battery installation & replacement, 1-6
button descriptions,2-15
Dolby button, 5-4
DTS button, 5-4
menu button, 2-16
mode family selection buttons, 5-4
MUSIC button, 5-4
operation considerations, 2-9
OSD button, 2-13
overview, 2-9
TV button, 5-4
REMOTE ONLY parameter, 3-56, 3-58
REMOTE STATE parameter, 3-52
removable access panel, 2-7
RESET MODE parameter, 5-34, 5-40
restoring factory-default settings, 6-5
REVERB LVL parameter, 5-40
ROLLOFF parameter, 5-11, 5-40
routine maintenance, 6-4
RS-232 connectors, 2-8
I-4
JBL
S
safety instructions, 1-ii
sample rate conversion, 3-25
SAMPLE RATE parameter, 2-27
SDP-40HD
about, 1-2
front panel overview, 2-2–2-4
highlights, 1-4
product registration, 1-5
rear panel overview, 2-5–2-8
selecting preferred listening modes, 3-14
setup
menu, 2-17, 3-2
SETUP parameter, 3-59
SHAPE parameter, 5-40
shift
command bank, 3-20
SIDE L/R parameter, 3-31, 3-33, 5-40
SIZE parameter, 5-40
SOUND STAGE parameter, 5-40
SOURCE parameter, 5-13, 5-41
speaker
calibration parameters, 3-39
SETUP menu, 3-2
setup parameters, 3-31
SPEAKER ANGLE panorama parameter, 5-13, 5-41
SPEECH DETECT parameter, 5-41
SPREAD parameter, 5-41
standby button, 2-3
STAT button, 2-14
STATUS menu
descriptions, 2-22
HDMI, 2-20
parameter descriptions, 2-26–2-27
STATUS parameter, 3-51, 3-53
subwoofer
LFE parameter, 3-35
output level control, 5-41
SUB L/R LVL parameter, 5-41
SUB L/R parameter, 3-31, 3-35, 5-41
SUB XOVER parameter, 3-35
THX boundary gain compensation, 3-37
SURR ROLLOFF parameter, 5-41
SURROUND DLY parameter, 5-41
SURROUND EX parameter, 5-42
SURROUND MIX parameter, 5-42
S-VIDEO 16:9 parameter, 3-20
T
THX
5.1mc THX listening mode, 5-4, 5-29–5-30
5.1mc THX MUSIC listening mode, 5-31
5.1mc THX SurEX listening mode, 5-29–5-30
5.1mc THX UL2Cin listening mode, 5-29–5-30
boundary gain compensation (BGC), 3-31, 3-37
Dolby Digital 5.1 THX listening modes, 5-4
listening mode, 5-18
SPEAKER SETUP screen, 3-30
SurEX listening mode, 5-18
ULTRA2 listening mode, 5-18
ULTRA2 SUB parameter, 3-31
TILT EQ parameter, 4-2, 4-5
TREBLE parameter, 4-2, 4-4
trigger
output connectors, 2-8
SETUP menu, 3-2
troubleshooting, 6-2
two-line status
main zone, 2-19
record zone, 2-20
zone 2, 2-19
V
VIDEO IN menu, 3-13
video input connectors, 2-6
video output connectors, 2-6–2-7
VOCAL ENHANCE parameter, 5-42
volume control
knob, 2-3
SETUP menu, 3-2
SDP-40HD
Index
W
WORD LENGTH parameter, 2-27
Z
zone 2
input parameter, 3-23–3-24
ZONE PWR ON parameter, 3-54
ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-2, 4-7
ZONE2 IN parameter, 3-19
zones
about, 2-19
input selection buttons, 2-4
Off buttons, 2-4
I-5
Index
I-6
JBL
SYNTHESIS LIMITED WARRANTY
The JBL Synthesis products listed below are warranted
for the period stated from the date of original purchase:
Amplifiers, Equalizers, and Surround Sound Processors –
two (2) year warranty.
Who is protected by this warranty?
Your JBL warranty protects the original owner and all
subsequent owners, so long as the original bill of sale is
presented when warranty service is requested.
What is covered by the JBL warranty?
Your JBL warranty covers all defects in the material and
workmanship with the following specified exceptions:
This warranty covers only the actual defects within the
product itself, and does not cover the costs of installation or
removal from a fixed installation, normal set-up, or
adjustments, claims based on any misrepresentation by the
seller, or performance variations resulting from installation
related circumstances such as program source quality or
AC power.
Although you must pay any shipping charges incurred in
getting your JBL product to an Authorized Warranty Station
or to the factory, we will pay return shipping charges within
the United States if the repairs are covered by the warranty.
Please be sure to save the original shipping cartons
because a nominal charge will be made for additional
cartons.
How to obtain warranty service
Limitation on implied warranties
If your JBL product ever needs service, we may direct you
to an Authorized JBL Warranty Station, or ask you to send
your unit to the factory for repair, in which case we’ll also
supply a Service Return Authorization and complete
shipping instructions. If the product was purchased in a
country other than the USA, it is necessary to return the
product to the distributor or selling location in the same
country. Either way, you’ll need to present the original bill
of sale to establish the date of purchase. Please do not
ship your JBL product to the factory without our prior
authorization. In the United States, please call 1-818-8308757 for the location of the authorized warranty station
nearest you.
Implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for
particular purpose are limited in duration to the length of this
warranty, unless otherwise provided by state law.
1.
Damage caused by accident, unreasonable use,
or neglect (including the lack of reasonable and
necessary maintenance.
2.
Damage caused by improper installation or adjustment.
3.
Damage occurring during shipment (claims must be
presented to the carrier).
4.
Damage to or deterioration of any accessory or
decorative surface.
5.
Damage resulting from failure to follow instructions
contained in your user guide.
6.
Damage resulting from the performance of repairs by
someone other than an authorized JBL warranty station
If service under this warranty is not necessary, but you have
questions regarding the Installation or operation of this unit,
please contact your authorized JBL dealer or call 1-818830-8757 for further assistance.
7.
Any JBL unit on which the serial number has been
effaced, modified, or removed.
Who pays for what?
8.
Units which have been altered or modified in design,
appearance, or construction.
9.
Products sold on an "as-is" or final sale basis.
JBL will be happy to pay all labor and material expenses for
all repairs covered by this warranty. If necessary repairs are
not covered by this warranty or if a unit is examined which
is not in need of repair, you will be charged for the repairs or
the examination.
Exclusion of certain damages
JBL’s liability is limited to the repair or replacement at our
option, of any defective product and shall in no event include
incidental or consequential commercial damages of any
kind.
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts and/or do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so they above
limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
also have other rights which vary from state to state.
We sincerely thank you for your expression of confidence in
JBL products. This equipment has been painstakingly
assembled by highly trained craftspeople. It should give you
many years of musical enjoyment.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement